english Catalogue 2010/2011 SYSTEMS FOR TIME, LIGHT, CLIMATE

Transcription

1 english Catalogue 2010/2011 SYSTEMS FOR TIME, IGHT, CIMATE

2 Product families Digital time switches 9 TR 610 top2 10 TR 612 top2 10 TR 611 top2 12 TR 611 top2 RC 12 TR 622 top2 12 TR 608 top 14 SEEKTA 170 top2 16 SEEKTA 171 top2 RC 16 SEEKTA 172 top2 16 TR 641 top2/rc 18 TR 642 top2/rc 18 TR 644 top2/rc 18 EM 4 top2 20 EM A top2 20 SEEKTA 173 DCF 21 TR 641 S/DCF 22 TR 642 S/DCF 22 TR 644 S/DCF 22 TR 635 top 24 TR 636 top 24 TR 685/2 top 26 TR 030 top 27 theben-eltimo 28 Analogue time switches 31 SY 160 a 32 SU 180 a 32 MEM 190 a 32 SY 151 h 34 SY 161 d 34 SU 181 d 34 SU 191 w 34 TM 171 h 36 SY 161 h 36 SU 181 h 36 TM 178 h 38 SY 168 h 38 SU 188 h 38 MEM 198 h 38 SU 188 g/hw 40 SY 169 s 42 SU 189 s 42 SY 269 h/g 44 SU 289 h/g 44 TM 179 h 46 SU 189 hw 46 SU theben-timer 50 FRI 77 h/g 52 Time relays 55 TM 345 M 56 TM 345 B 56 Hour counters 58 BZ BZ BZ BZ BZ BZ BZ Presence detectors 63 Präsenzight SPHIX AP 66 SPHIX /2 AP 66 SPHIX SPHIX /2 66 compact of ce 68 compact of ce DIM 70 compact passage 72 compact passimo WH 74 ECO-IR 360A 76 ECO-IR 360C T 78 ECO-IR DUA-C T 80 PlanoCentro 82 Präsenzight ECO-IR 180A 88 compact of ce 24V 90 compact passage 24V 94 ECO-IR V 96 ECO-IR 180A-24V 98 Motion detectors 101 UXA UXA UXA /150W 104 UXA /500W 104 UXA SPHIX SPHIX SPHIX UXA UXA /2 110 UXA AP 112 UXA /2 AP 112 UXA UXA T 114 Twilight switches 117 UA UA UA UA 111 top2 120 UA 112 top2 120 UA 120 top2 122 UA 121 top2 RC 122 UA 122 top2 RC 122 UA 126 star 124 UA 127 star 124 UA 128 star 124 UA 129 star-time 124 Staircase time switches 127 EPA EPA EPA 3 EPA 7 EPA 8 EPA 9 EPA 4 EPA 047 EPA Clock thermostats 135 RAMSES 811 top2 136 RAMSES 831 top2 136 RAMSES 812 top2 138 RAMSES 832 top2 138 RAMSES 813 top2 Set 140 RAMSES 833 top2 Set 142 RAMSES 855 top2 OT 144 RAMSES 366/1 top 146 RAMSES 366/2 top 146 RAMSES 784 S 148 RAMSES 722 S 148 RAMSES 782 S 148 RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES Room thermostats 153 RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES 706 RAMSES 707 RAMSES 708 RAMSES 709 RAMSES 741 RAMSES 746 RAMSES 748 RAMSES 741 RA RAMSES 746 RA RAMSES 748 RA RAMSES 714 RAMSES 714 A RAMSES 714 A/FH 158 RAMSES 751 RA 158 Sensor technology 161 AMU 716 USB 162 AMU 716 R 162 SOTHIS KX 167 Switching actuators 168 Dimming actuators 173 Blind actuators 176 Binary inputs 178 Multifunction displays 180 Room thermostats 181 Heating actuators 183 Motor-driven actuator 186 CO 2 sensor 187 Fan coil thermostat 188 Fan coil actuator 189 Motion detectors 190 Presence detectors 192 Weather stations 200 Brightness sensors 201 Temperature sensors 202 Time switches 204 Time transmitter 207 Power supply 208 USB interface 209 ine coupler 209 Secondary clocks 211 UXOR 213 UXOR UXOR 404/ UXOR DMB 2 S 214 UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR Sets 221 PHARAO 223 PHARAO-II 10 (AC) 224 PHARAO-II 11 (DC) 224 PHARAO-II 14 (AC) 224 PHARAO-II 15 (DC) 224 PHARAO-II 24 (AC) 224 PHARAO-II 25 (DC) 224 PHARAO-II Upgrade 224 UA 131 DDC 226 SUD 228 II 226 2

3 Product catalogue 2010 Content Digital time switches Week program Year program Astronomical program 1 TIME Analogue time switches 60 minutes program Day program Week program 2 Time relays/hour counters Time relays Hour counters analogue 3 Hour counters digital Presence detectors 230 V Indoor use 24 V Indoor use 4 IGHT Motion detectors Twilight switches Outdoor use Indoor use 5 DI rail, analogue and digital Wall mounting 6 Staircase time switches DI rail Flush mounting 7 Clock thermostats Digital clock thermostats Analogue clock thermostats 8 CIMATE Room thermostats Mechanical room thermostats Electronic room thermostats 9 Sensor technology CO 2 sensors Hygrostat 10 KX Building automation system Sensors and actors 11 SYSTEMS UXOR 230 V iving comfort control 12 PHARAO 230 V ogic controller 24 V ogic controller 13 ACCESSORIES 14 APPEDIX Index Discontinued models Explanations General conditions Agencies Advertising material order form 15 3

4 Systems for Time, ight and Climate Your specialist partner Theben AG Your partner for "Energy Saving Ideas" Dear customers and partners We are pleased to present you our new catalogue 2010/2011. With its clear structure and concise form we have considered the wishes and expectations of our customers. Charts show you the most important items of a product familiy, so that you can find quickly the suitable product for your own special application. But that isn`t all. Theben has improved its presentation on the web. Sophisticated search functions help you to find your way to the product you are looking for. You can save informations on leaflets and download them easily. And there are a lot more features to help you with your job. Catalogue and internet are closely linked to help you find the desired information quicker and easier. You enter the selected number of the desired article on and you get full details like data sheet, operating instructions and so on with one click. Improvements in energy efficiency remains a top issue with Theben. Our successful Energy Saving Ideas are being continually developed. Theben will go on offering intelligent products, systems and solutions which help save energy costs and protect the environment. This catalogue shows you new time switches, presence detectors, clock thermostats and KX products. We are sure that our new media will help you to offer solutions tailored to your customers' needs. Thomas Goes Chairman of the Board 4

5 Theben AG Systems for Time, ight and Climate Your specialist partner THEBE AG SYSTEMS FOR TIME, IGHT AD CIMATE In the first decades after the foundation in 1921 by P.E. Schwenk, our core competence were solutions for time controlling systems. Since then we have sold more than 30 millons of staircase time switches EPA 8. One of our most famous products is the theben timer, which we also sold more than 30 million times. With subsidiaries in Germany, Great Britain, France, Itlay, Switzerland and a world wide presence in more than 50 countries, our top priority are intelligent solutions for saving energy in daily live. ighting control by twilight switches, presence and motion detectors Climate control by analogue and digital clock thermostats for individual room control KX-systems for building control systems: from lighting and environment control to automatical solar control and weather stations The company is certified according to the international DI ISO 9001:2008 and we have an VDE authorized test laboratory. But we are also noted for our design: In 2009 our multifunction display VARIA 826 KX was honoured with the red dot design award. In 2010 we will go on developing efficient, energy-saving solutions for the controlling of time, light and climate according to our philosophy of Energy Saving Ideas. We will go on offering you exactly the products you want for your customers - the best systems for time, light and climate. 5

6 Your specialist partner Top Service Theben AG We are here to help you! WHOESAER MARKET Theben holds on to three-stage sales via wholesalers and retail trade. QUAITY Theben means supreme quality, guaranteed by consequental final testing. STORES Quick delivery through central storage. PHOE-HOTIE You can reach us from every building site. Quick assistance by our specialists Phone +49 (0) 74 74/ Monday to Thursday 7 am to 6 pm Friday 7 am to 4 pm E-MAI-HOTIE Technical experts are always at your service. Quick assistance by our specialists Fax +49 (0) 7474/ and tino.schlaich@theben.de (KX) christof.armbruster@theben.de mark.wiest@theben.de REPAIR SERVICE Our service department offers competitive prices for repairs even after the expiry of the warranty period. We also send you the requested spare parts, even for units not in the current range, to satisfy your customers' needs as quickly as possible. Please contact us, we are happy to assist you. 6

7 Theben AG Your specialist partner Top Service OPERATIG ISTRUCTIOS Operation instructions are available right around the clock. The KX manual provides you with detailed informations for the use of our products. Instructions and other informations can be found free of charge on the internet KX DATA BASE A constantly update the product data base it is always available on the Internet for free downloading. TEDERS Text for tenders for all Theben products are available on the web for downloading. TRAIIG FACIITIES Trainings are offered in your proximity. Central trainings by our own specialists and peripherally at our partners near your facilities upon request. TRADE FAIRS ational and international trade fairs inform you about our innovations: Mostra Convegno, Milan light+building, Frankfurt ECOM, Kiev EIADE, Oslo Home Technology Event, ondon belektro, Berlin GET ord, Hamburg SPS/IPC/DRIVES, uremberg

8 TIME 8

9 Section overview TIME Digital time switches 1 DI rail, 2 modules Program Weekly program Weekly program, Astronomical program Weekly program umber of channels Memory locations External inputs PC interface Memory card included Connection type Type Page 1 56 Spring terminals TR 610 top Spring terminals TR 612 top2 10 TR 611 top Spring terminals TR 611 top2 RC Spring terminals TR 622 top Spring terminals SEEKTA 170 top Spring terminals SEEKTA 171 top2 RC Spring terminals SEEKTA 172 top Screw terminals TR 610 top 24V Screw terminals TR 612 top 24V 15 DI rail, 1 module Weekly program 1 28 Screw terminals TR 608 top 14 DI rail, 3 modules Yearly program, Astronomical program Spring terminals TR 641 top2 18 Spring terminals TR 641 top2 RC Spring terminals TR 642 top2 18 Spring terminals TR 642 top2 RC 18 Spring terminals EM A top2 20 DI rail, 4 modules Yearly program, Spring terminals TR 644 top2 18 Astronomical program Spring terminals TR 644 top2 RC Spring terminals EM 4 top2 20 DI rail, 6 modules Yearly program, Astronomical program Screw terminals SEEKTA 173 DCF Screw terminals TR 641 S 22 TR 641 S DCF 22 Yearly program Screw terminals TR 642 S 22 TR 642 S DCF Screw terminals TR 644 S 22 TR 644 S DCF 22 Front panel/wall installation Weekly program Wall installation/3-point mounting 1 42 Screw terminals TR 635 top Screw terminals TR 636 top 24 Weekly program 2 42 Screw terminals TR 685/2 top 26 Flush-mounted Weekly program 1 42 Screw terminals TR 030 top 27 Socket (plug-in) Weekly program 1 36 Plug-in theben-eltimo 020 S Plug-in theben-eltimo 020 S DCF 28 9

10 Digital time switches DI-rail, 2 modules TIME 1 Digital time switches with weekly program TR 610 top2 TR 612 top2 Description Common functions Digital time switch with weekly program DuoFix spring terminals Text-oriented user guidance in the display 56 memory locations Interface for OBEISK top2 memory card (PC programming) 10 year power reserve (lithium battery) Zero-cross switching for relay-saving switching and high lamp loads O-OFF switching times Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching Integrated operating hour counter Holiday program Display backlit (can be turned off) PI coding Automatic summer/winter time changeover TR 610 top2 1 channel TR 610 top2 G As TR 610 top2, but: special device with extra relais (gold-bonded contacts) for switching of very low loads TR 612 top2 2 channels Product selection Program Programfunctions umber of channels Switching load < 1 ma Operating voltage Type Article number V AC TR 610 top ) V AC TR 610 top2 G Weekly program O/OFF V UC TR 610 top2 24V * 2 *Available June ) anguages: GB, E, P, F, D (other article numbers with additional languages on request) V AC TR 612 top ) V UC TR 612 top2 24V * http Additional technical data at: 10 Article number

11 TIME Digital time switches DI-rail, 2 modules 1 Technical data TR 610 top2 TR 610 top2 G TR 610 top2 24V TR 612 top2 TR 612 top2 24V Operating voltage V AC V UC V AC V UC Frequency Hz Width 2 modules Installation type DI-rail Power reserve 10 years Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 16 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A 2 A 10 A Incandescent/halogen lamps 2600 W 1400 W 2600 W 1400 W Min. switching capacity approx.10 ma <1 ma approx.10 ma Shortest switching time 1 min Time accuracy ± 0.5 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 3 VA Test approvals V V V V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 30 C +55 C Accessories Front panel mounting kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 OBEISK top2 PC set Art.o.: Details Page 229 OBEISK top2 memory card Art.o.: Details Page 230 Wall installation kit 35 mm Art.o.: Details Page 230 Connection example TR 610 top2 TR 612 top C2 C C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 11

12 Digital time switches DI-rail, 2 modules TIME 1 Digital time switches with weekly program TR 611 top2 TR 611 top2 RC TR 622 top2 Description Common functions Digital time switch with weekly program DuoFix spring terminals Text-oriented user guidance in the display 84 memory locations Interface for OBEISK top2 memory card (PC programming) OBEISK memory card included in delivery 10 year power reserve (lithium battery) Zero-cross switching for relay-saving switching and high lamp loads O-OFF switching times Pulse program Cycle program Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching Count-down timer Integrated operating hour counter Holiday program 2 random programs Display backlit (can be turned off) PI coding Automatic summer/winter time changeover TR 611 top2 1 channel External control input TR 611 top2 RC Time synchronisation option via connection of external DCF or GPS antenna (additional power unit required for GPS if only one device is connected to the antenna). 1 channel External control input TR 622 top2 2 channels 2 external control inputs Product selection Program Weekly program Programfunctions O/OFF Pulse Cycle umber of channels Control inputs 1 1 Time based on Operating voltage Type Article number Quartz Quartz/DCF77/ GPS 2 2 Quartz *Available June ) anguages: GB, E, P, F, D (other article numbers with additional languages on request) V AC T R 611 top ) V UC TR 611 top2 24V * V AC TR 611 top2 RC V UC TR 611 top2 RC 24V * V AC TR 622 top ) V UC TR 622 top2 24V * http Additional technical data at: 12 Article number

13 TIME Digital time switches DI-rail, 2 modules 1 Technical data TR 611 top2 TR 611 top2 24V TR 611 top2 RC TR 611 top2 RC 24V TR 622 top2 TR 622 top2 24V Operating voltage V AC V UC V AC V UC V AC V UC Frequency Hz Width 2 modules Installation type DI-rail Power reserve 10 years Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 16 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Incandescent/halogen lamps 2600 W Min. switching capacity approx.10 ma Shortest switching time 1 s Time accuracy ± 0.5 s/day (Quartz) ± 0.5 s/day (Quartz) or DCF77/ GPS ± 0.5 s/day (Quartz) Power consumption 3 VA Test approvals V V V V V V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 30 C +55 C Accessories OBEISK top2 PC set Art.o.: Details Page 229 OBEISK top2 memory card Art.o.: Details Page 230 Wall installation kit 35 mm Art.o.: Details Page 230 Additional accessories Front panel mounting kit Details Page 228 top2 RC DCF antenna Details Page 228 Antenna top2 RC-GPS Details Page 228 Power unit top2 GPS Details Page 229 Connection example TR 611 top2 TR 611 top2 RC TR 622 top2 Ext1 Ext C2 RC DCF max. 100 m C max. 100 m C RC RC GPS max. 100 m max. 100 m Ext1 Ext2 C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 13

14 Digital time switches DI-rail, 1 module TIME 1 TR 608 top Description Digital time switch with weekly program 1 channel Screw terminals Text-oriented user guidance in the display 28 memory locations 3 year power reserve (exchangeable lithium battery) O-OFF switching times Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching PI coding Automatic summer/winter time changeover Product selection Program umber of channels Memory locations Programfunctions Operating voltage Type Article number Weekly program 1 28 O/OFF 230 V AC TR 608 top Technical data TR 608 top Operating voltage Frequency Width Installation type Power reserve Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = V AC Hz 1 module DI-rail 3 years 16 A 6 A Incandescent/halogen lamps 1000 W Shortest switching time 1 min Time accuracy ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 2.5 VA Test approvals V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 10 C +55 C Accessories Wall installation kit 17.5 mm Art.o.: Details Page 230 Front panel mounting kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 Connection example TR 608 top C http Additional technical data at: 14 Article number

15 TIME Digital time switches DI-rail, 2 modules Digital time switches with weekly program V AC/12 24 V UC 1 Description Digital time switch with weekly program Screw terminals Text-oriented user guidance in the display 10 year power reserve (lithium battery) O-OFF switching times Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching PI coding Automatic summer/winter time changeover TR 610 top 120V/24V 1 channel 28 memory locations TR 612 top 120V/24V 2 channels 42 memory locations Product selection Program umber of channels Memory locations Programfunctions Operating voltage Type Article number V AC TR 610 top 120V V UC TR 610 top 24V Weekly program O/OFF V AC TR 610 top 120V V AC TR 612 top 120V V UC TR 612 top 24V Technical data TR 610 top 120V/24 V TR 612 top 120V/24V Operating voltage Frequency Width Installation type Power reserve Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = V AC/12-24 V UC Hz 2 modules DI-rail 10 years 16 A 10 A Incandescent/halogen lamps 1150 W Shortest switching time 1 min Time accuracy ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 6 VA Test approvals V W Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 10 C +55 C Accessories Connection example Wall installation kit 35 mm Art.o.: Details Page 230 Front panel mounting kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 TR 610 top 120V TR 612 top 120V C2 C C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 15

16 Digital time switches DI-rail, 2 modules TIME 1 Astronomical time switches with weekly program SEEKTA 170 top2 SEEKTA 171 top2 RC SEEKTA 172 top2 Description Common functions Astronomical time switch with weekly program Astronomical switching function (automatic calculation of sunrise and sunset times for the whole year) DuoFix spring terminals Text-oriented user guidance in the display Interface for OBEISK top2 memory card (PC programming) 10 year power reserve (lithium battery) Zero-cross switching for relay-saving switching and high lamp loads Calculated astronomical switching times Programmable O-OFF switching times Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching Integrated operating hour counter Holiday program Display backlit (can be turned off) PI coding Automatic summer/winter time changeover SEEKTA 170 top2 1 channel 54 memory locations SEEKTA 171 top2 RC Time synchronisation via connection of external DCF or GPS antenna (additional positioning for astronomical program with GPS antenna, top2 GPS power unit required, if only one device is connected to the antenna) 1 channel External control input 84 memory locations 3 special programs with yearly date function per channel Count-down timer SEEKTA 172 top2 As SEEKTA 170 top2, but: 2 channels Channel 1 or channel 2 can also be used purely as time switch channel 2 external control inputs 84 memory locations 3 special programs with yearly date function per channel Count-down timer Product selection Program Weekly program, Astronomical program *Available June 2010 Special program Yearly date function umber of channels 1 Control inputs Time based on Operating voltage Type Article number Quartz 1 Quartz/DCF77/GPS 2 2 Quartz V AC SEEKTA 170 top V UC SEEKTA 170 top2 24V * V AC SEEKTA 171 top2 RC V UC SEEKTA 171 top2 RC 24V * V AC SEEKTA 172 top V UC SEEKTA 172 top2 24V * http Additional technical data at: 16 Article number

17 TIME Digital time switches DI-rail, 2 modules 1 Technical data SEEKTA 170 top2 SEEKTA 170 top2 24V SEEKTA 171 top2 RC SEEKTA 171 top2 RC 24V SEEKTA 172 top2 SEEKTA 172 top2 24V Operating voltage V AC V UC V AC V UC V AC V UC Frequency Hz Width 2 modules Installation type DI-rail Power reserve 10 years Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 16 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Incandescent/halogen lamps 2600 W 1400 W 2600 W 1400 W 2600 W 1400 W Min. switching capacity approx.10 ma Shortest switching time 1 min Time accuracy ± 0.5 s/day (Quartz) ± 0.5 s/day (Quartz) or DCF77/GPS ± 0.5 s/day (Quartz) Power consumption 3 VA Test approvals V V V V V V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature -30 C +55 C Accessories OBEISK top2 PC set Art.o.: Details Page 229 OBEISK top2 memory card Art.o.: Details Page 230 Wall installation kit 35 mm Art.o.: Details Page 230 Additional accessories Front panel mounting kit Details Page 228 antenna top2 RC DCF Details Page 228 Antenna top2 RC-GPS Details Page 228 Power unit top2 GPS Details Page 229 Connection example SEEKTA 170 top2 SEEKTA 171 top2 RC SEEKTA 172 top2 Ext C2 C max. 100 m + Data C RC DCF RC GPS max. 100 m max. 100 m Ext1 Ext2 C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 17

18 Digital time switches DI-rail, 3 modules, 4 modules TIME 1 Digital time switches with yearly and astronomical time program TR 641 top2 TR 642 top2 RC TR 644 top2 Description Common functions Digital time switch with yearly and astronomical time program DuoFix spring terminals Text-oriented user guidance in the display 800 memory locations Interface for OBEISK top2 memory card (PC programming) 8 year power reserve (lithium battery) Zero-cross switching for relay-saving switching and high lamp loads O-OFF switching times Pulse program Cycle program Extensive annual clock functions Astronomical time switch function (automatic calculation of sunrise and sunset times for the whole year) Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching Count-down timer Integrated operating hour counter Holiday program 2 random programs Display backlit (can be turned off) PI coding Automatic summer/winter time changeover TR 641 top2 1 channel External control input TR 641 top2 RC Time synchronisation via connection of external DCF or GPS antenna (additional positioning for astronomical program with GPS antenna) 1 channel External control input Extension module can be connected OBEISK memory card included in delivery TR 642 top2 2 channels 2 external control inputs TR 642 top2 RC As TR 641 top2 RC, but: 2 channels 2 external control inputs TR 644 top2 4 channels 4 external control inputs TR 644 top2 RC As TR 641 top2 RC, but: 4 channels 4 external control inputs Product selection Program umber of channels Control inputs Time based on Memory card included Program functions Operating voltage Type Article number Yearly program, Astronomical program *Available July Quartz V AC TR 641 top * Quartz/DCF77/GPS V AC T R 641 top2 RC * Quartz Quartz/DCF77/GPS O/OFF Pulse Cycle V AC V AC TR 642 top2 TR 642 top2 RC * * Quartz V AC TR 644 top * Quartz/DCF77/GPS V AC TR 644 top2 RC * http Additional technical data at: 18 Article number

19 TIME Digital time switches DI-rail, 3 modules, 4 modules 1 Technical data TR 641 top2 TR 641 top2 RC TR 642 top2 TR 642 top2 RC TR 644 top2 Operating voltage V AC Frequency Hz Width 3 modules 4 modules Installation type DI-rail Power reserve 8 years Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 16 A 2 x 16 A + 2 x 10 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6 Incandescent/halogen lamps Min. switching capacity Shortest switching time Time accuracy ± 0.5 s/day (Quartz) ± 0.5 s/day (Quartz) or DCF77/GPS ± 0.5 s/day (Quartz) 10 A 2600 W approx.10 ma 1 s ± 0.5 s/day (Quartz) or DCF77/GPS Power consumption 0.5 VA Test approvals V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature -30 C +55 C ± 0.5 s/day (Quartz) TR 644 top2 RC ± 0.5 s/day (Quartz) or DCF77/GPS Accessories OBEISK top2 PC set Art.o.: Details Page 229 Antenna top2 RC DCF for TR 641 top2 RC, TR 642 top2 RC, TR 644 top2 RC Art.o.: Details Page 228 Antenna top2 RC-GPS for TR 641 top2 RC, TR 642 top2 RC, TR 644 top2 RC Art.o.: Details Page 228 Additional accessories Wall installation kit 52.5 mm Details Page 230 Front panel mounting kit Details Page 228 Wall installation kit 70 mm Details Page 230 OBEISK top2 memory card Details Page 230 Connection example TR 641 top2 RC TR 642 top2 RC TR 644 top2 RC RC DCF C2 RC DCF C2 C4 RC DCF max. 100 m Ext1 C Data RC GPS max. 100 m max. 100 m Ext1 Ext2 C Data RC GPS max. 100 m max. 100 m max. 100 m max. 100 m Ext1 Ext2 Ext3 Ext4 Data C1 C RC GPS httpadditional technical data at: Article number 19

20 Digital time switches DI-rail, 4 modules, 3 modules TIME 1 Extension modules EM 4 top2 EM A top2 Description EM 4 top2 Extension module for TR 641 top2 RC, TR 642 top2 RC and TR 644 top2 RC 4 channels Width: 4 modules DuoFix spring terminals 4 external inputs Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching 4 EDs for displaying switching status Zero-cross switching for relay-saving switching and high lamp loads EM A top2 Ethernet communication module for remote access via A-DS network to time switches TR 641 top2 RC, TR 642 top2 RC and TR 644 top2 RC Remote programming using OBEISK top2 PC software Direct remote access to time switch (e.g. reading out switching status, performing manual switching, checking time) Width: 3 modules Product selection Type Article number EM 4 top * EM A top * *Available July 2010 Accessories Connection example Front panel mounting kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 Additional accessories Wall installation kit 70 mm Details Page 230 Wall installation kit 52.5 mm Details Page 230 EM 4 top2 max. 100 m max. 100 m max. 100 m max. 100 m C2 C4 Ext1 Ext2 Ext3 Ext4 Data EM A top2 Data C1 C http Additional technical data at: 20 Article number

21 TIME Digital time switches DI-rail, 6 modules SEEKTA 173 DCF 1 Description Astronomical time switch with yearly program 2 channels DCF radio control option via external antenna Astronomical switching function (automatic calculation of sunrise and sunset times for the whole year) Screw terminals 120 memory locations Interface for OBEISK memory card (PC programming) 1.5 year power reserve (exchangeable lithium battery) Calculated astronomical switching times Programmable O-OFF switching times Annual clock function with xed public holidays or date ranges and public holidays dependent on Easter Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching Holiday program Programs can be encoded to protect against unauthorised access Automatic summer/winter time changeover Product selection Program umber of channels Memory locations Time based on Operating voltage Type Article number Yearly program, Astronomical program Quartz/DCF77 110/230 V AC SEEKTA 173 DCF Technical data Operating voltage Frequency Width Installation type Power reserve Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = V AC Hz 6 modules DI-rail 1.5 years 16 A 10 A SEEKTA 173 DCF Incandescent/halogen lamps 2300 W Shortest switching time 1 min Time accuracy ± 1 s/day (Quartz) or DCF77 Power consumption 8 VA Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature -10 C +55 C Accessories Connection example OBEISK PC set Art.o.: Details Page 229 Additional accessories DCF77 antenna Details Page 226 Wall installation kit 105 mm Details Page 231 Front panel mounting kit Details Page 228 OBEISK memory card Details Page 230 SEEKTA 173 DCF C2 110 V~ 230 V~ C1 DCF RC DCF httpadditional technical data at: Article number 21

22 Digital time switches DI-rail, 6 modules TIME 1 Digital time switches with yearly program TR 641 S TR 642 S DCF TR 644 S Description Common functions Digital time switch with yearly program Screw terminals 324 memory locations Interface for OBEISK memory card (PC programming) 1.5 year power reserve (exchangeable lithium battery) O-OFF switching times Pulse program 1x switching Extensive annual clock functions Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching Holiday program Random program Programs can be encoded to protect against unauthorised access Automatic summer/winter time changeover TR 641 S 1 channel TR 641 S DCF 1 channel DCF radio control option via external antenna Separate power unit required for DCF antenna TR 642 S 2 channels TR 642 S DCF 2 channels DCF radio control option via external antenna Separate power unit required for DCF antenna TR 644 S 4 channels TR 644 S DCF 4 channels DCF radio control option via external antenna Separate power unit required for DCF antenna Product selection Program umber of channels Memory locations Time based on Operating voltage Type Article number Yearly program V AC TR 641 S Quartz 12 V DC TR 641 S 12V Quartz/DCF V AC T R 641 S DCF Quartz V AC T R 642 S Quartz/DCF V AC TR 642 S DCF V AC T R 644 S V AC T R 644 S 120V Quartz 24 V UC T R 644 S 24V V AC T R 644 S 12V Quartz/DCF V AC T R 644 S DCF http Additional technical data at: 22 Article number

23 TIME Digital time switches DI-rail, 6 modules 1 Technical data TR 641 S TR 641 S 12V TR 642 S TR 644 S TR 644 S 120V TR 644 S 24V TR 644 S 12V TR 641 S DCF TR 642 S DCF Operating voltage 12 V DC V AC 120 V AC 24 V UC 12 V AC V AC V AC Frequency Hz Hz TR 644 S DCF Width Installation type Power reserve Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6 Incandescent/halogen lamps 6 modules DI-rail 1.5 years 16 A 10 A 2300 W Min. switching capacity approx.10 ma Shortest switching time 1 s Time accuracy ± 1 s/day (Quartz) ± 1 s/day (Quartz) or DCF77 Power consumption 8 VA Test approvals V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature -10 C +55 C Accessories OBEISK PC set Art.o.: Details Page 229 Antenna DCF77 for TR 641 S DCF, TR 642 S DCF, TR 644 S DCF Art.o.: Details Page 228 Power unit DCF77 for TR 641 S DCF, TR 642 S DCF, TR 644 S DCF Art.o.: Details Page 229 Additional accessories Front panel mounting kit Details Page 228 Wall installation kit 105 mm Details Page 231 OBEISK memory card Details Page 230 Connection example TR 641 S DCF TR 642 S DCF TR 644 S DCF DCF C2 DCF C2 C4 DCF C DCF DCF C DCF DCF C1 C DCF DCF httpadditional technical data at: Article number 23

24 Digital time switches Front panel installation/wall installation TIME 1 Digital time switches wall installation TR 635 top TR 636 top Description Common functions Digital timer switch with weekly program Text-oriented user guidance in the display 42 memory locations 10 year power reserve (lithium battery) O-OFF switching times Pulse program Cycle program Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching Holiday program Random program PI coding Automatic summer/winter time changeover TR 635 top 1 channel TR 636 top 2 channels Product selection Program umber of channels Memory locations Programfunctions Weekly program O/OFF, Pulse, Cycle O/OFF, Pulse, Cycle Operating voltage Type Article number V AC TR 635 top V AC TR 636 top http Additional technical data at: 24 Article number

25 TIME Digital time switches Front panel installation/wall installation 1 Technical data TR 635 top TR 636 top Operating voltage V AC Frequency Hz Installation type Front panel installation/wall installation Power reserve 10 years Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 16 A 6 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A 6 A Incandescent/halogen lamps 2300 W 1200 W Shortest switching time 1 s Time accuracy ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 6 VA 8 VA Test approvals V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature -10 C +55 C Accessories Quick fastening 72 x 72 Art.o.: Details Page 229 Scale drawings TR 635 top, TR 636 top Connection example TR 635 top TR 636 top C C1 C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 25

26 Digital time switches Wall installation/3-point mounting TIME 1 TR 685/2 top Description Digital tariff time switch with weekly program 2 channels Text-oriented user guidance in the display 42 memory locations 6 year power reserve (exchangeable lithium battery) O-OFF switching times Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching PI coding Holiday program Display and control panel can be turned by 90 Control ED for battery change Automatic summer/winter time changeover Product selection Program umber of channels Memory locations Programfunctions Operating voltage Type Article number Weekly program 2 42 O/OFF 110 /230 V AC TR 685/2 top Technical data TR 685/2 top Operating voltage Frequency Power reserve Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = V AC Hz 6 years 8 A 2 A Shortest switching time 1 min Time accuracy ± 0.25 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 10 VA Type of protection IP 54 Protection class II in accordance with E 62, Ambient temperature -25 C +55 C Scale drawings TR 685/2 top Connection example TR 685/2 top ,5 6,5 230V~ 110V~ C1 C a ,5 101,5 http Additional technical data at: 26 Article number

27 TIME Digital time switches Flush-mounted TR 030 top 1 Description Digital time switch with weekly program 1 channel Text-oriented user guidance in the display 42 memory locations 10 year power reserve (lithium battery) O-OFF switching times Pulse program Cycle program Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching Holiday program Random program PI coding Automatic summer/winter time changeover Product selection Program umber of channels Memory locations Weekly program 1 42 Programfunctions O/OFF Pulse, Cycle Operating voltage Type Article number 230 V AC TR 030 top Technical data TR 030 top Operating voltage Frequency Installation type Power reserve Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6 Incandescent/halogen lamps 230 V AC 50 Hz Flush-mounted wall installation 10 years 10 A 10 A 2300 W Shortest switching time 1 s Time accuracy ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 6 VA Test approvals V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature -10 C +35 C Scale drawings TR 030 top Connection example TR 030 top ,5 C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 27

28 Digital time switches Plug-in TIME 1 Digital plug-in timers theben-eltimo 020 S theben-eltimo 020 S DCF Description Common functions Digital plug-in timer with weekly program Use with earthed sockets (additional socket types upon request) 1 channel Easy operation via keys for program function and day of the week, hours and minutes O-OFF switching times Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switching Random program Automatic summer/winter time changeover theben-eltimo 020 S 36 memory locations theben-eltimo 020 S DCF DCF radio control 33 memory locations Product selection Program umber of channels Memory locations Time based on Operating voltage Type Article number Weekly program 1 36 Quartz 230 V AC theben-eltimo 020 S Quartz/DCF V AC t heben-eltimo 020 S DCF http Additional technical data at: 28 Article number

29 TIME Digital time switches Plug-in 1 Technical data theben-eltimo 020 S theben-eltimo 020 S DCF Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Installation type Socket (plug-in) Power reserve 20 days Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 16 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Incandescent/halogen lamps 3500 W Shortest switching time 1 min Time accuracy ± 1 s/day (Quartz) ± 1 s/day (Quartz) or DCF77 synchronous Power consumption 5 VA Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II for housing, I for plug system as per E Ambient temperature -10 C +40 C Scale drawings theben-eltimo 020 S, theben-eltimo 020 S DCF 64, ,3 129,4 101,9 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 29

30 TIME 30

31 Section overview TIME Analogue time switches DI rail, 1 module Program umber of channels Type of contact Power reserve Shortest switching time Programmable every Connection type Daily program 1 O contact 15 min 15 min Screw terminals SY 160 a 32 3 days 15 min 15 min Screw terminals SU 180 a 32 Weekly program 1 O contact 3 days 2 h 2 h Screw terminals MEM 190 a 32 DI rail, 3 modules 60 minute program 1 changeover contact 37.5 s 37.5 s Spring terminals SY 151 h min 15 min Spring terminals SY 161 d 34 Daily program 1 changeover contact 200 hours 15 min 15 min Spring terminals SU 181 d 34 Weekly program 1 changeover contact 200 hours 2 h 2 h Spring terminals SU 191 w 34 Type Page 2 Daily program 1 changeover contact 3 days 30 min 30 min Screw terminals SU 181 h minute program 1 changeover contact 2 min 37.5 s Screw terminals TM 178 h 38 Daily program 1 changeover contact 30 min 15 min Screw terminals SY 168 h 38 3 days 30 min 15 min Screw terminals SU 188 h 38 Weekly program 1 changeover contact 3 days 4 h 1 h Screw terminals MEM 198 h 38 Daily program 2 2 changeover contacts 3 days 30 min 30 min Screw terminals SU 188 g 40 Daily program and 1/2 day OFF 1 changeover contact 3 days 45 min/12 h 45 min/12 h Screw terminalss SU 188 hw 40 function Front panel/wall installation Daily program 1 changeover contact 15 min 15 min Screw terminals SY 169 s 42 3 days 15 min 15 min Screw terminals SU 189 s 42 1 changeover contact 20 min/2 h 5 min, 30 min Screw terminals SY 269 h changeover contacts 20 min/2 h 5 min, 30 min Screw terminals SY 269 g 44 Daily program 1 changeover contact 3 days 20 min/2 h 5 min, 30 min Screw terminals SU 289 h changeover contacts 3 days 20 min/2 h 5 min, 30 min Screw terminals SU 289 g minute program 1 changeover contact 1.25 min 18.5 s Screw terminals TM 179 h 46 Daily program and 1/2 day OFF function 1 changeover contact 3 days 30 min/12 h 15 min/12 h Screw terminals SU 189 hw 46 Wall installation/3-point mounting Daily program 1 changeover contact 6 days 20 min 5 min Screw terminals SU 285/1 T changeover contacts 6 days 20 min 5 min Screw terminals SU 285/2 T 48 Socket (plug-in) Daily program 1 O contact 15 min 15 min Socket intermediate connector theben-timer 26 IP theben timer Weekly program 1 O contact 2 h 2 h Socket intermediate connector theben timer Wall-mounted Daily and defrost 1 changeover contact 2 min/1 h 1 min/1 h Screw terminals FRI 77 h 52 program 2 2 changeover contacts 2 min/1 h 1 min/1 h Screw terminals FRI 77 g 52 Drive with quick fastening for DI rail Daily and defrost program 1 changeover contact 2 min/1 h 1 min/1 h Screw terminals FRI 77 h changeover contacts 2 min/1 h 1 min/1 h Screw terminals FRI 77 g

32 Analogue time switches DI-rail, 1 module TIME Analogue time switches 1 module switching segments 2 SY 160 a SU 180 a MEM 190 a Description Common functions Analogue time switch 1 channel Screw terminals Manual switch with 3 positions: Permanent O/AUTO/permanent OFF Switching status display SY 160 a Daily program Without power reserve 96 switching segments Synchronised with mains Shortest switching time: 15 minutes SU 180 a As SY 160 a, but: With power reserve (exchangeable imh rechargeable battery) Quartz controlled MEM 190 a Weekly program With power reserve (exchangeable imh rechargeable battery) 84 switching segments Quartz controlled Shortest switching time: 2 hours Product selection Program Daily program Weekly program umber of channels 1 Power reserve Shortest switching time Programmable every Type of contact Operating voltage Type Article number 15 min 15 min O contact 230 V AC SY 160 a days 15 min 15 min O contact 230 V AC SU 180 a days 2 h 2 h O contact 230 V AC MEM 190 a http Additional technical data at: 32 Article number

33 TIME Analogue time switches DI-rail, 1 module Technical data SY 160 a SU 180 a MEM 190 a Operating voltage 230 V AC V AC Frequency 50 Hz Hz Width 1 module Installation type DI-rail Program Daily program Weekly program Power reserve 3 days Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 16 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Shortest switching time 15 min 2 h Programmable every 15 min 2 h Time accuracy Synchronised with mains ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 1 VA Test approvals V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 25 C +50 C 10 C +50 C 2 Accessories Wall installation kit 17.5 mm Art.o.: Details Page 230 Front panel mounting kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 Connection example SY 160 a, SU 180 a, MEM 190 a C1 2 1 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 33

34 Analogue time switches DI-rail, 3 modules TIME Analogue time switches 3 modules switching segments 2 SY 151 h SU 181 d SU 191 w Description Common functions Analogue time switch 1 channel DuoFix spring terminals Switching preselection Manual switch with 3 positions: Permanent O/AUTO/permanent OFF Switching status display SY 151 h 60 minute program Without power reserve 96 switching segments Synchronised with mains Shortest switching time: 37.5 seconds SY 161 d Daily program Without power reserve 96 switching segments Synchronised with mains Shortest switching time: 15 minutes Clock hands for time display and in addition 12/24 hour recognition Simple summer/winter time correction SU 181 d As SY 161 d, but: With power reserve (imh rechargeable battery) Quartz controlled SU 191 w Weekly program With power reserve (imh rechargeable battery) 84 switching segments Quartz controlled Shortest switching time: 2 hours Clock hands for time display and in addition 12/24 hour recognition Simple summer/winter time correction Product selection Program 60 minute program Daily program Weekly program umber of channels Power reserve Shortest switching time Programmable every s 37.5 s 1 15 min 15 min 200 hours 15 min 15 min hours 2 h 2 h Type of contact Changeover contact Changeover contact Changeover contact Changeover contact Operating voltage Type Article number 230 V AC SY 151 h V AC SY 161 d V AC V AC SU 181 d SU 191 w http Additional technical data at: 34 Article number

35 TIME Analogue time switches DI-rail, 3 modules Technical data SY 151 h SY 161 d SU 181 d SU 191 w Operating voltage 230 V AC V AC Frequency 50 Hz Hz Width 3 modules Installation type DI-rail Program 60 minute program Daily program Weekly program Power reserve 200 hours Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 10 A 16 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Shortest switching time 37.5 s 15 min 2 h Programmable every 37.5 s 15 min 2 h Time accuracy Synchronised with mains ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 1 VA Test approvals V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 20 C +55 C 2 Accessories Wall installation kit 52.5 mm Art.o.: Details Page 230 Front panel mounting kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 Connection example SY 151 h, SY 161 d, SU 181 d, SU 191 w C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 35

36 Analogue time switches DI-rail, 3 modules TIME Analogue time switches 3 modules switching segments 12/24 V UC 2 SU 181 h Description SU 181 h Analogue time switch Daily program 1 channel With power reserve (imh rechargeable battery) 48 switching segments Shortest switching time: 30 minutes Screw terminals Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switch Switching status display Operating indication Simple summer/winter time correction Product selection Program umber of channels Power reserve Shortest switching time Programmable every Type of contact Operating voltage Type Article number Daily program 1 3 days 30 min 30 min Changeover contact 24 V UC S U 181 h 24V V UC SU 181 h 12V http Additional technical data at: 36 Article number

37 TIME Analogue time switches DI-rail, 3 modules Technical data SU 181 h 24V SU 181 h 12V Operating voltage 24 V UC 12 V UC Frequency Hz Width 3 modules Installation type DI-rail Program Daily program Power reserve 3 days Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 16 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Shortest switching time 30 min Programmable every 30 min Time accuracy ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 1 VA Test approvals V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 20 C +50 C 2 Accessories Terminal box cover plate 52.5 mm Art.o.: Details Page 228 Front panel mounting kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 Connection example SU 181 h 12V/24V 7 C V/24V httpadditional technical data at: Article number 37

38 Analogue time switches DI-rail, 3 modules TIME Analogue time switches 3 modules tappet 2 TM 178 h SU 188 h MEM 198 h Description Common functions Analogue time switch 1 channel Tappets Screw terminals Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switch Switching status display TM 178 h 60 minute program Without power reserve Synchronised with mains Shortest switching time: 75 seconds 6 tappets included in delivery SY 168 h Daily program Without power reserve Synchronised with mains Shortest switching time: 30 minutes Simple summer/winter time correction Operating indication 6 tappets included in delivery SU 188 h As SY 168 h, but: With power reserve (imh rechargeable battery) Quartz controlled 8 tappets included in delivery MEM 198 h Weekly program With power reserve (imh rechargeable battery) Quartz controlled Shortest switching time: 4 hours 14 tappets included in delivery Product selection Program 60 minute program Daily program Weekly program umber of channels Power reserve Shortest switching time Programmable every 1 2 min 37.5 s 1 30 min 15 min 3 days 30 min 15 min 1 3 days 4 h 1 h Type of contact Changeover contact Changeover contact Changeover contact Changeover contact Operating voltage Type Article number 230 V AC TM 178 h V AC S Y 168 h V AC SU 188 h V AC M EM 198 h http Additional technical data at: 38 Article number

39 TIME Analogue time switches DI-rail, 3 modules Technical data TM 178 h SY 168 h SU 188 h MEM 198 h Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Hz Width 3 modules Installation type DI-rail Program 60 minute program Daily program Weekly program Power reserve 3 days Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 10 A 16 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Shortest switching time 2 min 30 min 4 h Programmable every 37.5 s 15 min 1 h Time accuracy Synchronised with mains ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 1 VA Test approvals V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 20 C +55 C 2 Accessories Terminal box cover plate 52.5 mm Art.o.: Details Page 228 Front panel mounting kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 Connection example TM 178 h, SY 168 h, SU 188 h, MEM 198 h 7 C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 39

40 Analogue time switches DI-rail, 3 modules TIME Analogue time switches 3 modules tappet 2 SU 188 g SU 188 hw Description Common functions Analogue time switch With power reserve (imh rechargeable battery) Quartz controlled Tappets Screw terminals Switching status display Operating indication SU 188 g Daily program 2 channels Fine adjustment to set the time to the minute Shortest switching time: 30 minutes 10 tappets included in delivery SU 188 hw Daily program and 1/2 day OFF function for the weekdays 1 channel (with series connection of the 2 contacts) Tappets and turning segments Shortest switching time: 45 minutes (12 hours for the 1/2 day OFF function) 6 tappets included in delivery Product selection Program Daily program Daily program and 1/2 day OFF function umber of channels Power reserve Shortest switching time Programmable every 2 3 days 30 min 30 min 1 3 days 45 min/12 h 45 min/12 h Type of contact 2 Changeover contacts Changeover contact Operating voltage Type Article number 230 V AC S U 188 g V AC SU 188 hw http Additional technical data at: 40 Article number

41 TIME Analogue time switches DI-rail, 3 modules Technical data SU 188 g SU 188 hw Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency Hz Width 3 modules Installation type DI-rail Program Daily program Daily program with 1/2 day OFF function Power reserve 3 days Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 10 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Shortest switching time 30 min 45 min/12 h Programmable every 30 min 45 min/12 h Time accuracy ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 1 VA Test approvals V Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 20 C +55 C 2 Accessories Connection example Terminal box cover plate 52.5 mm Art.o.: Details Page 228 Front panel mounting kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 SU 188 g SU 188 hw C2 7d C1 24h httpadditional technical data at: Article number 41

42 Analogue time switches Front panel installation/wall installation TIME Analogue time switches wall installation switching segments 2 SY 169 s SU 189 s Description Common functions Analogue time switch with daily program 1 channel 96 switching segments Shortest switching time: 15 minutes Clock hands for time display Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switch Switching status display Simple summer/winter time correction SY 169 s Without power reserve Synchronised with mains SU 189 s With power reserve (imh rechargeable battery) Quartz controlled Product selection Program Daily program umber of channels 1 Power reserve Shortest switching time Programmable every 15 min 15 min 3 days 15 min 15 min Type of contact Changeover contact Changeover contact Operating voltage Type Article number 230 V AC SY 169 s V AC SU 189 s V AC SU 189 s 110V http Additional technical data at: 42 Article number

43 TIME Analogue time switches Front panel installation/wall installation Technical data SY 169 s SU 189 s SU 189 s 110V Operating voltage 230 V AC 110 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Hz Installation type Front panel installation/wall installation Program Daily program Power reserve 3 days Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 10 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Shortest switching time 15 min Programmable every 15 min Time accuracy Synchronised with mains ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 1 VA Test approvals W Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 10 C +55 C 2 Accessories Scale drawings Connection example Quick fastening 72 x 72 Art.o.: Details Page 229 SY 169 s, SU 189 s SY 169 s, SU 189 s C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 43

44 Analogue time switches Front panel installation/wall installation TIME Analogue time switches wall installation tappet 2 SY 269 h SU 289 g Description Common functions Analogue time switch with daily or weekly program (switching disc can be turned) Tappets Shortest switching time: 20 minutes or 2 hours Clock hands for time display Switching status display SY 269 h 1 channel Without power reserve Synchronised with mains Switching preselection Permanent O/OFF switch Simple summer/winter time correction 32 tappets included in delivery SY 269 g 2 channels Without power reserve Synchronised with mains 49 tappets included in delivery SU 289 h As SY 269 h, but: With power reserve (imh rechargeable battery) Quartz controlled SU 289 g 2 channels With power reserve (imh rechargeable battery) Quartz controlled 49 tappets included in delivery Product selection Program Daily program or weekly program umber of channels Power reserve Shortest switching time Programmable every 1 20 min or 2 h 5 min or 30 min 2 20 min or 2 h 5 min or 30 min 1 3 days 20 min or 2 h 5 min or 30 min 2 3 days 20 min or 2 h 5 min or 30 min Type of contact Changeover contact 2 Changeover contacts Changeover contact 2 Changeover contacts Operating voltage Type Article number 230 V AC S Y 269 h V AC S Y 269 g V AC S U 289 h V AC S U 289 g http Additional technical data at: 44 Article number

45 TIME Analogue time switches Front panel installation/wall installation Technical data SY 269 h SY 269 g SU 289 h SU 289 g Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Hz Installation type Front panel installation/wall installation Program Daily program or weekly program Power reserve 3 days Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 10 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Shortest switching time 20 min or 2 h Programmable every 5 min or 30 min Time accuracy Synchronised with mains ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 1 VA Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 10 C +55 C 2 Accessories Quick fastening 72 x 72 Art.o.: Details Page 229 Scale drawings SY 269 h, SY 269 g, SU 289 h, SU 289 g Connection example SY 269 h, SU 289 h SY 269 g, SU 289 g C C1 C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 45

46 Analogue time switches Front panel installation/wall installation TIME Analogue time switches wall installation tappets 2 TM 179 h SU 189 hw Description TM 179 h Analogue time switch with 60 minute program 1 channel Without power reserve Synchronised with mains Tappets Shortest switching time: 75 seconds Switching preselection Switching status display 6 tappets included in delivery SU 189 hw Analogue time switch with daily program and 1/2 day OFF function for the weekdays 1 channel (with series connection of the 2 contacts) With power reserve (imh rechargeable battery) Quartz controlled Tappets and turning segments Shortest switching time: 30 minutes (12 hours for the 1/2 day OFF function) Switching status display 6 tappets included in delivery Product selection Program 60 minute program Daily program and 1/2 day OFF function umber of channels Power reserve Shortest switching time Programmable every min 18.5 s 1 3 days 30 min/12 h 15 min/12 h Type of contact Changeover contact Changeover contact Operating voltage Type Article number 230 V AC TM 179 h V AC S U 189 hw http Additional technical data at: 46 Article number

47 TIME Analogue time switches Front panel installation/wall installation Technical data TM 179 h SU 189 hw Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Hz Installation type Front panel installation/wall installation Program 60 minute program Daily program with 1/2 day OFF function Power reserve 3 days Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 10 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Shortest switching time 1.25 min 30 min/12 h Programmable every 18.5 s 15 min/12 h Time accuracy Synchronised with mains ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 1 VA Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 10 C +55 C 2 Accessories Quick fastening 72 x 72 Art.o.: Details Page 229 Scale drawings TM 179 h, SU 189 hw Connection example TM 179 h SU 189 hw C h 7d httpadditional technical data at: Article number 47

48 Analogue time switches Wall installation/3-point mounting TIME Analogue time switch wall installation/3-point mounting 2 SU 285/1 T SU 285/2 T Description Common functions Analogue time switch with daily program With power reserve (exchangeable imh battery) Quartz controlled Tappets Shortest switching time: 20 minutes Clock hands for time display Switching status display Simple summer/winter time correction Control ED for battery change 32 tappets included in delivery SU 285/1 T 1 channel SU 285/2 T 2 channels Product selection Program Daily program umber of channels Power reserve Shortest switching time Programmable every 1 6 days 20 min 5 min 2 6 days 20 min 5 min Type of contact Changeover contact 2 Changeover contacts Operating voltage Type Article number 110/230 V AC S U 285/1 T /230 V AC S U 285/2 T http Additional technical data at: 48 Article number

49 TIME Analogue time switches Wall installation/3-point mounting Technical data SU 285/1 T Operating voltage 110 V AC/230 V AC Frequency Hz Program Daily program Power reserve 6 days Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 6 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Shortest switching time 20 min Programmable every 5 min Time accuracy ± 1 s/day(quartz) Power consumption 1 VA Type of protection IP 54 Protection class II in accordance with E 62, Ambient temperature 10 C +55 C SU 285/2 T 2 Scale drawings SU 285/1 T, SU 285/2 T Connection example SU 285/1 T SU 285/2 T ,5 6, a C a C1 C ,5 101,5 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 49

50 Analogue time switches Plug-in TIME Analogue socket time switches switching segments 2 theben-timer 26 theben-timer 26 IP 44 theben-timer 27 Description Common functions Analogue plug-in timer 1 channel Without power reserve Synchronised with mains Use with earthed sockets (additional socket types upon request) Switching preselection Switching status display theben-timer 26 Daily program 96 switching segments Shortest switching time: 15 minutes theben-timer 26 IP 44 As theben-timer 26, but: Waterproof protection for damp locations and outdoor areas Transparent cover theben-timer 27 Weekly program 84 switching segments Shortest switching time: 2 hours Product selection Program Shortest switching time Programmable every Type of contact Operating voltage Type Article number theben-timer Daily program 15 min 15 min O contact 230 V AC t heben-timer 26 IP Weekly program 2 h 2 h O contact 230 V AC t heben-timer http Additional technical data at: 50 Article number

51 TIME Analogue time switches Plug-in Technical data theben-timer 26 theben-timer 26 IP 44 theben-timer 27 Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Installation type Socket (plug-in) Program Daily program Weekly program Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 16 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Shortest switching time 15 min 2 h Programmable every 15 min 2 h Time accuracy Synchronised with mains Power consumption 0.8 VA Test approvals V Type of protection IP 20 IP 44 IP 20 Protection class I in accordance with E Ambient temperature 10 C +55 C 40 C +55 C 10 C +55 C 2 Scale drawings Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 51

52 Analogue time switches Wall installation/di rail TIME Analogue cooling timers - tappets 2 FRI 77 h FRI 77 g-2 Description Common functions Analogue cooling timer with daily and short time program for defrosting Tappets Synchronised with mains Shortest switching time: 2 minutes / 1 hour 2 separate switching discs FRI 77 h 1 channel Wall-mounted 6 tappets included in delivery FRI 77 g 2 channels Wall-mounted 8 tappets included in delivery Optional delayed switching on of fan FRI 77 h-2 1 channel Drive with quick fastening for DI rail 6 tappets included in delivery FRI 77 g-2 As FRI 77 g, but: Drive with quick fastening for DI rail Product selection Type of contact Installation type Shortest switching time Programmable every Operating voltage Type Article number Changeover contact Wall-mounted 2 min/1 h 1 min/1 h 230 V AC F RI 77 h Changeover contacts Wall-mounted 2 min/1 h 1 min/1 h 230 V AC F RI 77 g Changeover contact Drive with quick fastening for DI rail 2 min/1 h 1 min/1 h 230 V AC F RI 77 h Changeover contacts Drive with quick fastening for DI rail 2 min/1 h 1 min/1 h 230 V AC F RI 77 g http Additional technical data at: 52 Article number

53 TIME Analogue time switches Wall installation/di rail Technical data FRI 77 h FRI 77 g FRI 77 h-2 FRI 77 g-2 Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Installation type Wall-mounted Drive with quick fastening for DI rail Program Daily and defrost program Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = 1 16 A Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC, cos = A Shortest switching time 2 min/1 h Programmable every 1 min/1 h Time accuracy Synchronised with mains Power consumption 2.5 VA Test approvals V W Type of protection IP 20 IP 00 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 10 C +50 C 2 Scale drawings FRI 77 h-2, FRI 77 g FRI 77 h-2, FRI 77 g Connection example FRI 77 h, FRI 77 h-2 FRI 77 g, FRI 77 g-2 K K1 K httpadditional technical data at: Article number 53

54 TIME 54

55 Section overview TIME Time relay/hour counter Time relay Description Type Page Multi-function relay TM 345 M 56 3 Time relay with time switch function TM 345 B 56 Analogue hour counter Installation type Front plate size Type Page BZ x 48 mm Front panel installation BZ x 52 mm BZ DI-rail 35 x 45 mm BZ Digital hour counter Front panel installation 24 x 48 mm BZ x 48 mm BZ DI-rail 35 x 45 mm BZ httpadditional technical data at: Article number 55

56 Time relay/hour counter Analogue TIME Time relay DI-rail TM 345 M TM 345 B 3 Description Common functions Electronic time relay Electronic time relay can be used universally for controlling automatic processes in machines, lighting, ventilation, heating, cupboards etc. Precise analogue time setting Multi-voltage input for all supply and control voltages, no jumpers or additional terminals are required ED to display the switching status TM 345 M Multi-function relay ocking rotary switch for the selection of time range as well as the following operating modes: - Response delay, without control contact - Wiper switch-on without control contact - Release delay with control contact - Pulse former with control contact - On/Off switching delay with control contact - Wiper switch On/Off with control contact - Time switch generator without control contact TM 345 B Time relay with time switch function Pulse and pause duration can be set independently of each other Product selection Type Article number T M 345 M TM 345 B http Additional technical data at: 56 Article number

57 TIME Time relay/hour counter Analogue Technical data TM 345 M TM 345 B Operating voltage V AC/DC V AC/24 V DC Frequency Hz Width 1 module Power consumption 1.5 VA Type of contact Changeover contact Housing and insulation material High-temperature resistant, self-extinguishing thermoplast Switch output Potential free Electrical service life 10 5 operation cycles Mechanical service life < 10 5 operation cycles Fall back value of nominal input voltage < 10.8 V AC/DC (according with E ) Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 20 C +60 C 3 Accessories Connection example Wall installation kit 17.5 mm TM 345 M TM 345 M TM 345 B Art.o.: Details Page 230 S A1+ 15 B2 A1+ 15 B2 A A A A2- httpadditional technical data at: Article number 57

58 Time relay/hour counter Analogue TIME Analogue hour counter Front panel and DI rail BZ BZ BZ Description BZ Hour counter with synchronous power drive Versions for direct voltage with quartzcontrolled stepper motor Progress display Front panel devices with click-in or stretch clamp supports for walls up to a maximum of 10 mm thick Clamp or at plug connection 6.3 mm Front plate 48 x 48 mm size BZ ike BZ 142-1, however: With plug-in base for wall installation (front panel kit required) Plug-in base with quick fastening for 35 mm DI rail Terminal screws Contact protection to comply with accident prevention regulation BGV A3 Housing colour: anthracite BZ ike BZ 142-1, however: Front plate 52 x 52 mm size BZ 145 Hour counter Built in distributor device with quick fastening for 35 mm DI rail Top mounting with additional terminal box cover plate, sealable Control panel installation with assembly kit no Contact protection to comply with accident prevention regulation BGV A3 Captive terminal screws Product selection Counting range Installation type Front plate size Integrated part size Operating voltage Type Article number 230 V AC BZ V AC B Z V , hours without reset Front panel installation 48 x 48 mm 46 x 46 mm V AC B Z V V AC B Z V BZ V AC 52 x 52 mm 46 x 46 mm BZ DI-rail 35 x 45 mm 35 x 45 mm 230 V AC B Z V DC B Z V http Additional technical data at: 58 Article number

59 TIME Time relay/hour counter Analogue Technical data BZ BZ V BZ V BZ V BZ BZ BZ 145 BZ V Operating voltage 230 V AC 110 V AC V AC 24 V AC 230 V AC V DC Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz Width 2 modules Installation type Front panel installation DI-rail Protection rating Front frame IP 65 IP 65 Protection class II in accordance with E 60,335-1 Ambient temperature 20 C +70 C 10 C +70 C 3 Accessories Clamping bracket BZ For BZ 142-1, BZ Art.o.: Details Page 231 Baf e 72 x 72 for BZ For BZ Art.o.: Details Page 231 Front panel kit BZ For BZ Art.o.: Details Page 231 Wall installation kit 35 mm For BZ 145 Art.o.: Details Page 230 Baf e 55 x 55 for BZ For BZ Art.o.: Details Page 231 Plug-in base BZ For BZ Art.o.: Details Page 231 Scale drawings BZ BZ BZ Ø 50 Ø 50 Ø , , httpadditional technical data at: Article number 59

60 Time relay/hour counter Digital TIME Digital hour counter Front panel and DI rail BZ 146 BZ 147 BZ Description Common functions 7-digit high-contrast CD display Onscreen progress display Digital hour counter EEPROM memory ensures reliable elapsed time counting, even during loss of power BZ 146 Control panel installation Terminal screws Tension clamp brackets for walls up to 5mm thick Quartz controlled version Installation cutout 22 mm x 45 mm BZ 147 ike BZ 146, however: Installation cutout 45 mm x 45 mm BZ 148 Built in distributor device with quick fastening for 35 mm DI rail Surface mounting with additional terminal box cover plate option Captive terminal screws Product selection Counting range Installation type Front plate size Integrated part size Operating voltage Type Article number 99, hours without reset 24 x 48 mm 22 x 45 mm V AC BZ Front panel installation 48 x 48 mm 45 x 45 mm V AC BZ V DC B Z V DI-rail 35 x 45 mm 35 x 45 mm V AC B Z Technical data BZ 146 BZ 147 BZ V BZ 148 Operating voltage V AC V DC V AC Frequency Hz Width 2 modules Installation type Front panel installation DI-rail Protection rating IP 65 IP 65 (front side) Protection class II in accordance with E Ambient temperature 30 C +70 C 10 C +70 C http Additional technical data at: 60 Article number

61 TIME Time relay/hour counter Digital Accessories Clamping bracket BZ For BZ 147 Art.o.: Details Page 231 Wall installation kit 35 mm For BZ 148 Art.o.: Details Page Scale drawings BZ 146 BZ , ,6 24 0,2 37, ,2 +0,3 3 37, ,2 +0,3 Connection example BZ 146, BZ 147 BZ 148 (+) ( ) (+) ( ) httpadditional technical data at: Article number 61

62 IGHT http Additional technical data at: Article number 62

63 Section overview IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Installation type Detection area at 3.0 m installation height - Sitting - Detection area at 3.0 m installation height - Walking - Channel Function mode Protection rating Type Page Ceiling 20 m² ( 4.5 x 4.5 m) 49 m² ( 7.0 x 7.0 m) ight Switching IP 54 Presenceight Ceiling 20 m² 5.0 m 360 ) 113 m² 12.0 m 360 ) Ceiling 25 m² ( 5.0 x 5.0 m) 49 m² ( 7.0 x 7.0 m) ight Switching IP 41 SPHIX AP 66 ight Presence Switching IP 41 SPHIX /2 AP 66 ight Switching IP 41 SPHIX ight Presence Switching IP 41 SPHIX /2 66 ight Presence Switching IP 40 compact of ce 68 ight 1 10 V Dimming IP 40 compact of ce DIM 70 4 Ceiling 90 m² ( 20 x 4.5 m) 135 m² ( 30 x 4.5 m) compact passage 72 ight Presence Switching IP m² ( 10 x 4.5 m) 68 m² ( 15 x 4.5 m) compact passimo 74 ight Presence Switching IP 40 ECO-IR 360A 76 Ceiling 49 m² ( 7.0 x 7.0 m) 81 m² ( 9.0 x 9.0 m) Ceiling 49 m² ( 7.0 x 7.0 m) 81 m² ( 9.0 x 9.0 m) ight Presence Switching IP 40 ECO-IR 360C T 78 2 x ight Switching IP 40 ECO IR DUA C T 80 ight Presence PlanoCentro 101-EWH 82 PlanoCentro 000-EWH 82 Switching IP 40 ight Presence PlanoCentro 101-UWH 82 PlanoCentro 000-UWH 82 Wall 28 m² 7.0 m 180 ) 100 m² 16.0 m 180 ) ight Switching IP 54 Presenceight Wall 32 m² 8.0 m 180 ) 100 m² 16.0 m 180 ) ight Presence Switching IP 40 ECO-IR 180A V Ceiling 25 m² ( 5.0 x 5.0 m) 49 m² ( 7.0 x 7.0 m) ight Presence Switching IP 40 compact of ce 24V 90 ight 0 10 V Switching IP 40 compact of ce 24V ux 92 Ceiling 90 m² ( 20 x 4.5 m) 135 m² ( 30 x 4.5 m) ight Presence Switching IP 40 compact passage 24V 94 Ceiling 49 m² ( 7.0 x 7.0 m) 81 m² ( 9.0 x 9.0 m) ight Presence Switching IP 40 ECO-IR V 96 Wall 32 m² 8.0 m 180 ) 100 m² 16.0 m 180 ) ight Presence Switching IP 40 ECO-IR 180A-24V 98 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 63

64 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT Presenceight 360 Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Square detection area Ceiling installation IP 54 protection rating for installation in wet zones Mixed light measurement ight switch output (relay, 230 V) Automatic lighting control ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay Pulse function for staircase timer Can be con gured remotely The pulse function is for controlling a staircase timer The presence detector has a mixed light measurement and is suitable for switching the following types of lamp: Flourescent lamps (F/P), halogen and incandescent lamps The square detection range from Presenceight 360 allows accurate and simple planning Test operation mode checks the detection area and installation The parameters can either be set using the potentiometer or via the optional service remote control QuickSet plus Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) Presenceight Ceiling installation ight 230 V AC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) Presenceight 360 BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) Presenceight 360 SR further colours on request Technical data Presenceight 360 Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Setting range lx Recommended installation height 2 3 m ight switch-off delay Impulse (0.5 s), 10 s 20 min ight contact type Relay 230 V Resistive load 1400 VA Incandescent and halogen lamp load 1200 W Compact and ourescent lamps 10 x (1 x 58 W), 5 x (2 x 58 W), 16 x (1 x 36 W), 8 x (2 x 36 W), 16 x (smaller than 36 W) Ambient temperature 20 C +50 C Protection rating IP 54 http Additional technical data at: 64 Article number

65 4 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Detection area (square) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) 2 m 9 m² 3.0 m x 3.0 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m ± 0.5 m A 0.8 ux 2.5 m 16 m² 4.0 m x 4.0 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0m ± 0.5 m B C 3 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m 49 m² 7.0 m x 7.0 m ± 1.0 m 3.5 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m ± 1.0 m 4 Accessories QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 QuickSet plus Art.o.: Details Page 234 clic Art.o.: Details Page 233 Surface frame Presenceight Art.o.: Details Page 232 Scale drawings 86 40, , ,7 26, Connection example Presenceight Presenceight Presenceight httpadditional technical data at: Article number 65

66 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT SPHIX 104 SPHIX /2 SPHIX AP 4 Description Common functions Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) ighting control with adjustable light threshold value and adjustable switch-off delay Teach-in of current brightness value possible via remote control Additional impulse function can be selected for combination with staircase timer (EPA), building automation or PC Master/slave function: Up to ten detectors to expand detection area. Test function for checking detection area Zero-cross switching SPHIX channel (light) Ceiling installation Automatic lighting control based on presence and brightness Detection range can be limited using three enclosed segments Mixed light measurement suitable for the control of uorescent, incandescent and halogen lamps Instant start-up possible via factory preset Push-button or switch options for manual switching Screwless terminals for quick installation SPHIX /2 2 channels 2. Relay for HVAC control, presence dependent HVAC control with programmable switchon delay and switch-off delay SPHIX AP 1 channel SPHIX /2 AP 2 channels 2. Relay for HVAC control, presence dependent HVAC control with programmable switchon delay and switch-off delay Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Type Article number Surface mounted on ceiling Ceiling installation ight 230 V AC SPHIX AP ight Presence 230 V AC SPHIX /2 AP ight 230 V AC SPHIX ight Presence 230 V AC SPHIX / Technical data SPHIX AP SPHIX /2 AP SPHIX SPHIX /2 Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency Hz Setting range lx Switching capacity light 16 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) 8 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) Switching capacity Presence 5 A (at 250 V AC or 30 V DC) 3 A (at 250 V AC or 30 V DC) Recommended installation height m ight switch-off delay 1 s 20 min Presence switch-off delay min min http Additional technical data at: 66 Article number

67 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V SPHIX AP SPHIX /2 AP SPHIX SPHIX /2 Presence switch-on delay 0 60 min 0 60 min Incandescent lamp load 2000 W 1800 W Fluorescent tubes ➀ not corrected, series-corrected 900 VA Flourescent lamps ➁ 400 VA Compact uorescent lamps ➁ 4 x 7 W, 3 x 11 W, 3 x 15 W, 3 x 20 W, 3 x 23 W Ambient temperature 10 C +55 C Protection class II in accordance with E 60,669-1 Protection rating IP 41 ➀ conventional ballast, ➁ electronic ballast 4 Detection range Accessories 360 2,5 m SPHIX RC 104 pro Art.o.: Details Page 235 Additional accessories SPHIX RC 104, Details Page 235 RC lter, Details Page m Walking Sitting Installation height 2.5 m Scale drawings Connection example Ext Ext Ext Ext M/S M/S M/S M/S M/S M/S M M/S M/S P1 P2 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 67

68 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT compact of ce Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Square detection area Mixed light measurement The square detection area allows accurate and simple planning ight switch output (relay, 230 V) Presence switch output (relay, oating) Automatic control of lighting and HVAC as well as room monitoring function ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay Choice of fully or semi automatic operation Sensor or switch options for manual switching Pulse function for staircase timer HVAC control with switch-on delay and switch-off delay Fully or semi-automatic: In "Fully automatic" mode, the lighting switches on and off automatically according to presence and light. In "Semi automatic" mode, it must be switched on manually and switches off automatically The sensitivity of the presence switch output is reduced in the "monitoring" position. The contact indicates the presence of people with a high degree of certainty Device can be connected as master or slave Test operation mode checks the detection area and installation The parameters can either be set using the potentiometer or via the optional service remote control QuickSet plus A maximum of 10 detectors can be switched at the same time Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) compact of ce Ceiling installation ight Presence 230 V AC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) compact of ce BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) compact of ce SR further colours on request Technical data compact of ce Operating voltage Frequency Setting range Recommended installation height ight switch-off delay Presence switch-off delay Presence switch-on delay ight contact type 230 V AC 50 Hz lx 2 3 m Impulse (0.5 s), 10 s 20 min 10 s 120 min 0 s 10 min Relay 230 V Resistive load Incandescent and halogen lamp load Compact and ourescent lamps Presence contact type 1400 VA 1200 W 10 x (1 x 58 W), 5 x (2 x 58 W), 16 x (1 x 36 W), 8 x (2 x 36 W), 16 x (smaller than 36 W) Floating relay Switching capacity Presence 50 W (220 V DC), 50 VA (250 V AC) minimal 0.5 mv/10 ma Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 http Additional technical data at: 68 Article number

69 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Detection area (square) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) 2 m 9 m² 3.0 m x 3.0 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m ± 0.5 m A 0.8 ux 2.5 m 16 m² 4.0 m x 4.0 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m ± 0.5 m B C 3 m 25 m² 5.0 m x 5.0 m 49 m² 7.0 m x 7.0 m ± 1.0 m 3.5 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m ± 1.0 m 4 Accessories QuickSet plus Art.o.: Details Page 234 clic Art.o.: Details Page 233 QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 Surface frame compact Art.o.: Details Page 232 Scale drawings 102, , Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 69

70 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT compact of ce DIM Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Square detection area Mixed light measurement The square detection area allows accurate and simple planning ight switching output (relay, 230 V) and 1 10 V interface Automatic lighting control with constant light control Choice of fully or semi automatic operation Possible connection of sensor for manual switching and dimming Brightness threshold, self-learning switchoff delay and standby time are adjustable Fully or semi-automatic: In "Fully automatic" mode, the lighting switches on and off automatically according to presence and light. In "Semi automatic" mode, it must be switched on manually and switches off automatically The standby time guarantees a minimum brightness and provides for a sense of security in hospital and care environments as the lighting does not switch off when areas are unoccupied but remains in standby mode for the set time. Device can be connected as master or slave Test operation mode checks the detection area and installation The parameters can either be set using the potentiometer or via the optional service remote control QuickSet plus A maximum of 10 detectors can be switched at the same time Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) compact of ce DIM Ceiling installation ight 1 10 V 230 V AC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) compact of ce DIM BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) compact of ce DIM SR further colours on request Technical data compact of ce DIM Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Setting range lx Recommended installation height 2 3 m ight switch-off delay: 10 s 20 min ight contact type Relay 230 V Resistive load 1400 VA Incandescent and halogen lamp load 1200 W Compact and ourescent lamps 10 x (1 x 58 W), 5 x (2 x 58 W), 16 x (1 x 36 W), 8 x (2 x 36 W), 16 x (smaller than 36 W) Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 http Additional technical data at: 70 Article number

71 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Detection area (square) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) 2 m 9 m² 3.0 m x 3.0 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m ± 0.5 m A 0.8 ux 2.5 m 16 m² 4.0 m x 4.0 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m ± 0.5 m B C 3 m 25 m² 5.0 m x 5.0 m 49 m² 7.0 m x 7.0 m ± 1.0 m 3.5 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m ± 1.0 m 4 Accessories QuickSet plus Art.o.: Details Page 234 clic Art.o.: Details Page 233 QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 Surface frame compact Art.o.: Details Page 232 Scale drawings 102, , Connection example 1 10 V 1 10 V httpadditional technical data at: Article number 71

72 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT compact passage Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Rectangular detection range for corridors Mixed light measurement Automatic control of lighting and HVAC as well as room monitoring function ight switch output (relay, 230 V) Presence switch output (relay, oating) Choice of fully or semi automatic operation Sensor or switch options for manual switching The rectangular detection area covers an area of up to 30 metres in corridors and enables safe and simple planning Fully or semi-automatic: In "Fully automatic" mode, the lighting switches on and off automatically according to presence and light. In "Semi automatic" mode, it must be switched on manually and switches off automatically Device can be connected as master or slave ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay Pulse function for staircase timer HVAC control with switch-on delay and switch-off delay Presence switch contact for HVAC control: The switching behaviour of the oating contact is only controlled by presence The switch-on delay prevents instantaneous switch on. The contact only closes on completion of the switch-on delay The sensitivity of the presence switch output is reduced in the "monitoring" position. The contact indicates the presence of people with a high degree of certainty Test operation mode checks the detection area and installation The parameters can either be set using the potentiometer or via the optional service remote control QuickSet plus A maximum of 10 detectors can be switched at the same time Product selection Installation typec Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) compact passage Ceiling installation ight Presence 230 V AC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) compact passage BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) compact passage SR further colours on request Technical data compact passage Operating voltage Frequency Setting range Recommended installation height ight switch-off delay Presence switch-off delay Presence switch-on delay ight contact type 230 V AC 50 Hz lx m Impulse (0.5 s), 10 s 20 min 10 s 120 min 0 s 10 min Relay 230 V Resistive load Incandescent and halogen lamp load Compact and ourescent lamps Presence contact type 1400 VA 1200 W 10 x (1 x 58 W), 5 x (2 x 58 W), 16 x (1 x 36 W), 8 x (2 x 36 W), 16 x (smaller than 36 W) Floating relay Switching capacity Presence 50 W (220 V DC), 50 VA (250 V AC) minimal 0.5 mv/10 ma Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 http Additional technical data at: 72 Article number

73 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Detection area (rectangular) Installation height (A) Head on to (r) Diagonally (t) 2 m 56 m² 16 m x 3.5 m ± 1 m 105 m² 30 m x 3.5 m ± 1 m A ux 2.5 m 72 m² 18 m x 4.0 m ± 1 m 120 m² 30 m x 4.0 m ± 1 m 3 m 90 m² 20 m x 4.5 m ± 1 m 135 m² 30 m x 4.5 m ± 1 m r t 3.5 m 100 m² 20 m x 5.0 m ± 1 m 150 m² 30 m x 5.0 m ± 1 m r t 4 Accessories QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 QuickSet plus Art.o.: Details Page 234 clic Art.o.: Details Page 233 Surface frame compact Art.o.: Details Page 232 Scale drawings ,5 26, ,5 40, Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 73

74 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT compact passimo Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Rectangular detection area for storage areas with clear demarcation vertically below the presence detector Mixed light measurement Automatic control of lighting and HVACas well as room monitoring function ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay ight switch output (relay, 230 V) Presence switch output (relay, oating) Choice of fully or semi automatic operation Sensor or switch options for manual switching Fully or semi-automatic: In "Fully automatic" mode, the lighting switches on and off automatically according to presence and light. In "Semi automatic" mode, it must be switched on manually and switches off automatically Device can be connected as master or slave Pulse function for staircase timer HVAC control with switch-on delay and switch-off delay Presence switch contact for HVAC control: The switching behaviour of the oating contact is only controlled by presence The switch-on delay prevents instantaneous switch on. The contact only closes on completion of the switch-on delay The sensitivity of the presence switch output is reduced in the "monitoring" position. The contact indicates the presence of people with a high degree of certainty Test operation mode checks the detection area and installation The parameters can either be set using the potentiometer or via the optional service remote control QuickSet plus A maximum of 10 detectors can be switched at the same time Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) compact passimo WH * Ceiling installation ight Presence 230 V AC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) compact passimo BK * Silver (similar to RA 9006) compact passimo SR * further colours on request * Available May 2010 Technical data compact passimo Operating voltage Frequency Setting range Recommended installation height ight switch-off delay Presence switch-off delay Presence switch-on delay ight contact type 230 V AC 50 Hz lx m Impulse (0.5 s), 10 s 20 min 10 s 120 min 0 s 10 min Relay 230 V Resistive load Incandescent and halogen lamp load Compact and ourescent lamps Presence contact type 1400 VA 1200 W 10 x (1 x 58 W), 5 x (2 x 58 W), 16 x (1 x 36 W), 8 x (2 x 36 W), 16 x (smaller than 36 W) Floating relay Switching capacity Presence 50 W (220 V DC), 50 VA (250 V AC) minimal 0.5 mv/10 ma Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 http Additional technical data at: 74 Article number

75 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Detection area (rectangular) Installation height (A) Head on to (r) Diagonally (t) 2 m 28 m² 8 m x 3.5 m ± 1 m 53 m² 15 m x 3.5 m ± 1 m A ux r t 2.5 m 36 m² 9 m x 4.0 m ± 1 m 60 m² 15 m x 4.0 m ± 1 m 3 m 45 m² 10 m x 4.5 m ± 1 m 68 m² 15 m x 4.5 m ± 1 m r t 3.5 m 50 m² 10 m x 5.0 m ± 1 m 75 m² 15 m x 5.0 m ± 1 m Accessories 4 QuickSet plus Art.o.: Details Page 234 clic Art.o.: Details Page 233 QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 Surface frame compact Art.o.: Details Page 232 Scale drawings ,5 26, ,5 40, Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 75

76 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT ECO-IR 360A Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Square detection area Genuine daylight measurement The square detection area allows accurate and simple planning ight switch output (relay, 230 V) Presence switch output (relay, oating) Automatic control of lighting and HVAC ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay HVAC control with separate switch-off delay The presence detector has "Genuine light measurement" and is only suitable for switching uorescent lamps (F/P). Presence switch contact for HVAC control: The switching behaviour of the oating contact is only controlled by presence. The parameters are set via the potentiometer Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) ECO-IR 360A Ceiling installation ight Presence 230 V AC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) ECO-IR 360A BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) ECO-IR 360A SR further colours on request Technical data ECO-IR 360A Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Setting range lx Recommended installation height m ight switch-off delay 2 min 15 min Presence switch-off delay min ight contact type Relay 230 V Compact and ourescent lamps 12 x (1 x 58 W), 6 x (2 x 58 W), 18 x (1 x 36 W), 9 x (2 x 36 W), 18 x (smaller than 36 W) Maximum switching capacity 1400 VA Presence contact type Floating relay Switching capacity Presence 100 W (24 V DC), 460 VA (230 V AC), Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 http Additional technical data at: 76 Article number

77 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Detection area (square) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) 2 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m ± 0.5 m A 0.8 ux 2.5 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m ± 0.5 m B C 3 m 49 m² 7.0 m x 7.0 m 81 m² 9.0 m x 9.0 m ± 0.5 m 3.5 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m 100 m² 10.0 m x 10.0 m ± 1 m 4.0 m 121 m² 11.0 m x 11.0 m ± 1 m 4 Accessories QuickFix round cover Art.o.: Details Page 233 QuickFix square cover Art.o.: Details Page 232 Surface frame ECO-IR 360 Art.o.: Details Page 232 Additional accessories s. p. 232 QuickFix concrete round cover Details Page 232 QuickFix concrete square cover Details Page 233 QuickFix concrete ushmounted box Details Page 233 QuickFix concrete ushmounted housing Details Page 233 QuickSafe Details Page 233 Scale drawings ,5 46,3 21, ,5 37, ,5 Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 77

78 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT ECO-IR 360C T Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Square detection area Genuine daylight measurement The square detection area allows accurate and simple planning ight switch output (relay, 230 V) Presence switch output (relay, oating) Automatic control of lighting and HVAC as well as room monitoring function ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay Choice of fully or semi automatic operation Sensor or switch options for manual switching Pulse function for staircase timer HVAC control with switch-on delay and switch-off delay Inrush current limitation for EB Fully or semi-automatic: In "Fully automatic" mode, the lighting switches on and off automatically according to presence and light. In "Semi automatic" mode, it must be switched on manually and switches off automatically The presence detector has "Genuine light measurement" and is only suitable for switching uorescent lamps (F/P). The sensitivity of the presence switch output is reduced in the "monitoring" position. The contact indicates the presence of people with a high degree of certainty Device can be connected as master or slave Test operation mode checks the detection area and installation A maximum of 10 detectors can be switched at the same time Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) ECO-IR 360C T Ceiling installation ight Presence 230 V AC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) ECO-IR 360C T BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) ECO-IR 360C T SR further colours on request Technical data ECO-IR 360C T Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Setting range lx Recommended installation height m ight switch-off delay: Impulse (0.5 s), 10 s 20 min Presence switch-off delay 10 s 120 min Presence switch-on delay 0 s 10 min ight contact type Relays 230 V, inrush current limitation Compact and ourescent lamps 16 x (1 x 58 W), 8 x ( 2 x 58 W), 24 x (1 x 36 W), 12 x (2 x 36 W), 24 x (smaller than 36 W) Maximum switching capacity 1400 VA Presence contact type Floating relay Switching capacity Presence 100 W (50 V DC), 460 VA (230 V AC) minimal 10 V/100 ma Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 http Additional technical data at: 78 Article number

79 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Detection area (square) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) 2 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m ± 0.5 m A 0.8 ux 2.5 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m ± 0.5 m B C 3 m 49 m² 7.0 m x 7.0 m 81 m² 9.0 m x 9.0 m ± 0.5 m 3.5 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m 100 m² 10.0 m x 10.0 m ± 1 m 4.0 m 121 m² 11.0 m x 11.0 m ± 1 m 9.0 m 361 m² 19.0 m x 19.0 m ± 1 m 4 Accessories QuickSet plus Art.o.: Details Page 234 clic Art.o.: Details Page 233 Additional accessories s. p. 232 QuickFix round cover Details Page 233 QuickFix square cover Details Page 233 QuickFix concrete ush-mounted box Details Page 233 QuickSafe Details Page 233 Surface frame ECO-IR 360 Details Page 232 Scale drawings ,5 46,3 21, ,5 37, ,5 Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 79

80 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT ECO-IR DUA-C T Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Square detection area Genuine daylight measurement The square detection area allows accurate and simple planning Two light switch outputs (relay, 230 V) Automatic control of two lighting zones Two light switch outputs (relay, 230 V) ighting control with two light threshold values and self-learning switch-off delay Choice of fully or semi automatic operation Sensor or switch options for manual switching Inrush current limitation for EB Fully or semi-automatic: In "Fully automatic" mode, the lighting switches on and off automatically according to presence and light. In "Semi automatic" mode, it must be switched on manually and switches off automatically The presence detector has double "Genuine daylight measurement" and is only suitable for switching uorescent lamps (F/P). Device can be connected as master or slave Test operation mode checks the detection area and installation The parameters can either be set using the potentiometer or via the optional service remote control QuickSet plus A maximum of 10 detectors can be switched at the same time Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) ECO-IR DUA-C T Ceiling installation 2 x ight 230 V AC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) ECO-IR DUA-C T BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) ECO-IR DUA-C T SR further colours on request Technical data ECO-IR DUA-C T Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Setting range lx Recommended installation height m ight switch-off delay 10 s 20 min ight contact type Relays 230 V, inrush current limitation Maximal load 1400 VA (total both contacts) Compact and ourescent lamps 16 x (1 x 58 W), 8 x ( 2 x 58 W), 24 x (1 x 36 W), 12 x (2 x 36 W), 24 x (smaller than 36 W) Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 http Additional technical data at: 80 Article number

81 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Detection area (square) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) 2 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m ± 0.5 m A 0.8 ux 2.5 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m ± 0.5 m B C 3 m 49 m² 7.0 m x 7.0 m 81 m² 9.0 m x 9.0 m ± 0.5 m 3.5 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m 100 m² 10.0 m x 10.0 m ± 1 m 4.0 m 121 m² 11.0 m x 11.0 m ± 1 m 4 Accessories QuickSet plus Art.o.: Details Page 234 clic Art.o.: Details Page 233 Additional accessories s. p. 232 QuickFix round cover Details Page 233 QuickFix square cover Details Page 233 QuickFix concrete ush-mounted box Details Page 233 QuickSafe Details Page 233 Surface frame ECO-IR 360 Details Page 232 Scale drawings ,5 46,3 21, ,5 37, ,5 Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 81

82 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT PlanoCentro Description 4 Common functions Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Square 360 detection range allows accurate and simple planning Flush design Exchangeable cover according to shape, colour and material Mixed light measurement Presence and brightness-dependent control for lighting and HVAC systems Choice of fully or semi-automatic lighting control Connection option for sensors or switches for manual switching with automatic recognition Adjustable sensitivity Can be con gured remotely 6 prede ned basic settings on presence detector ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay Pulse function for staircase timer Presence output with switch-on delay and switch-off delay Parameters can be selected for subsequent changes Fully or semi-automatic: In "Fully automatic" mode, the lighting switches on and off automatically according to presence and light. In "Semi automatic" mode, it must be switched on manually and switches off automatically Test operation mode checks the detection range and con guration A maximum of 10 detectors can be switched at the same time PlanoCentro 101-EWH For ceiling installation (false ceilings) With installation for false ceilings and cover PlanoCentro 000-EWH Slave-Version for PlanoCentro 101-EWH Just to be used with PlanoCentro 101-EWH as Master PlanoCentro 101-UWH For ush-mounting (concrete ceiling) With metal installation frame for screwed xing in wooden ceilings or in ush-mounted sockets, incl. cover PlanoCentro 000-UWH Slave-Version for PlanoCentro 101-EWH Just to be used with PlanoCentro 101-EWH as Master Product selection Installation type Channel Function Colour Type Article number Ceiling mounting with installation frame Ceiling mounting ( ushmounting for concrete ceiling) * Available May 2010 ight Presence Master Slave ight Presence Master pure white, (similar to RA 9010) PlanoCentro 101-EWH pure black, (similar to RA 9005) PlanoCentro 101-EBK Silver (similar to RA 9006) PlanoCentro 101-ESR pure white, (similar to RA 9010) PlanoCentro 000-EWH * pure black, (similar to RA 9005) PlanoCentro 000-EBK * Silver (similar to RA 9006) PlanoCentro 000-ESR * pure white, (similar to RA 9010) PlanoCentro 101-UWH pure black, (similar to RA 9005) PlanoCentro 101-UBK Silver (similar to RA 9006) PlanoCentro 101-USR pure white, (similar to RA 9010) PlanoCentro 000-UWH * Slave pure black, (similar to RA 9005) PlanoCentro 000-UBK * Silver (similar to RA 9006) PlanoCentro 000-USR * further colours on request http Additional technical data at: 82 Article number

83 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Technical data PlanoCentro Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Setting range lx Recommended installation height m ight switch-off delay Impulse, 10 s 60 min Presence switch-off delay 10 s 120 min Presence switch-on delay 0 s 10 min ight contact type Relays 230 V/10 A Maximum switching capacity 2300 W (at cos = 1 resistive load), 1150 W (at cos = 0.5) Compact and ourescent lamps 20 x 54 W, 25 x 39 W, 10 x 2 W, 54 x 15 W, 2 x 39 W Presence contact type Floating relay Switching capacity Presence 60 W (220 V DC), 62.5 VA (250 V AC) minimal 0.5 mv/10 ma Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 4 Detection area (square) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) 2 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m ± 0.5 m A 0.8 ux 2.5 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m ± 0.5 m B C 3 m 49 m² 7.0 m x 7.0 m 81 m² 9.0 m x 9.0 m ± 0.5 m 3.5 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m 100 m² 10.0 m x 10.0 m ± 1 m Accessories SendoPro 868-A Art.o.: Details Page 234 SendoClic Art.o.: Details Page 234 Additional accessories Junction casing, 115 x 115 x 100 mm Details Page 233 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 83

84 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT PlanoCentro Scale drawings PlanoCentro ceiling mounting x 100 PlanoCentro Ceiling mounting ( ush-mounting for concrete ceiling) http Additional technical data at: 84 Article number

85 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Connection example PlanoCentro 101-EWH, PlanoCentro 101-UWH PlanoCentro 101-x-230V A P P S1 H1 H2 4 PlanoCentro 101-EWH, PlanoCentro 000-EWH, PlanoCentro 101-UWH, PlanoCentro 000-UWH PlanoCentro 101-x-230V Master PlanoCentro 000-x-230V Slave A P P S1 H1 H2 A P P S1 H1 H2 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 85

86 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT Presenceight 180 Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Detection area 180 Wall installation IP 54 protection rating for installation in wet zones Mixed light measurement ight switch output (relay, 230 V) Automatic lighting control ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay Pulse function for staircase timer Can be con gured remotely The pulse function is for controlling a staircase timer The presence detector has a mixed light measurement and is suitable for switching the following types of lamp: Flourescent lamps (F/P), halogen and incandescent lamps Test operation mode checks the detection area and installation The parameters can either be set using the potentiometer or via the optional service remote control QuickSet plus Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) Presenceight Wall installation ight 230 V AC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) Presenceight 180 BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) Presenceight 180 SR further colours on request Technical data Presenceight 180 Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Setting range lx Recommended installation height m ight switch-off delay Impulse (0.5 s), 10 s 20 min ight contact type Relay 230 V Resistive load 1400 VA Incandescent and halogen lamp load 1200 W Compact and ourescent lamps 10 x (1 x 58 W), 5 x (2 x 58 W), 16 x (1 x 36 W), 8 x (2 x 36 W), 16 x (smaller than 36 W) Ambient temperature 20 C +50 C Protection rating IP 54 http Additional technical data at: 86 Article number

87 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Detection area (semicircular) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) m 25 m² 7.0 m x 3.5 m 100 m² Ø 16 m A B C Accessories 4 QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 QuickSet plus Art.o.: Details Page 234 clic Art.o.: Details Page 233 Surface frame Presenceight Art.o.: Details Page 232 Scale drawings 86 40, ,3 26, Connection example Presenceight Presenceight Presenceight httpadditional technical data at: Article number 87

88 Presence detectors 230 V IGHT ECO-IR 180A Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Detection area 180 Genuine daylight measurement Automatic control of lighting and HVAC ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay HVAC control with separate switch-off delay The presence detector has "Genuine light measurement" and is only suitable for switching uorescent lamps (F/P). Presence switch contact for HVAC control: The switching behaviour of the oating contact is only controlled by presence The parameters are set via the potentiometer Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) ECO-IR 180A Wall installation ight Presence 230 V AC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) ECO-IR 180A BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) ECO-IR 180A SR further colours on request Technical data ECO-IR 180A Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Setting range lx Recommended installation height m ight switch-off delay 2 min 15 min Presence switch-off delay min ight contact type Relay 230 V Compact and ourescent lamps 12 x (1 x 58 W), 6 x (2 x 58 W), 18 x (1 x 36 W), 9 x (2 x 36 W), 18 x (smaller than 36 W) Maximum switching capacity 1400 VA Presence contact type Relay Switching capacity Presence 100 W (24 V DC), 460 VA (230 V AC), Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 Detection area (semicircular) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) m 32 m² 8 m x 4 m 100 m² Ø 16 m A B C http Additional technical data at: 88 Article number

89 IGHT Presence detectors 230 V Accessories QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 Surface frame ECO-IR 180 Art.o.: Details Page Scale drawings ,3 21, Connection example ECO-IR 180A ECO-IR 180A httpadditional technical data at: Article number 89

90 Presence detectors 24 V IGHT compact of ce 24V Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Square detection area Mixed light measurement The square detection area allows accurate and simple planning ight switch output (relay, oating) Presence switch output (relay, oating) Automatic control of lighting and HVAC as well as room monitoring function ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay Pulse function for staircase timer HVAC control with switch-on delay and switch-off delay Presence switch contact for HVAC control: The switching behaviour of the oating contact is only controlled by presence The sensitivity of the presence switch output is reduced in the "monitoring" position. The contact indicates the presence of people with a high degree of certainty Test operation mode checks the detection area and installation The parameters can either be set using the potentiometer or via the optional service remote control QuickSet plus Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) compact of ce 24V Ceiling installation ight Presence 24 V AC/DC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) compact of ce 24V BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) compact of ce 24V SR further colours on request Technical data compact of ce 24V Operating voltage 24 V AC/DC Setting range lx Recommended installation height 2 3 m ight switch-off delay Impulse (0.5 s), 10 s 20 min Presence switch-off delay 10 s 120 min Presence switch-on delay 0 s 10 min ight contact type Floating relay Presence contact type Floating relay Switching capacity Presence/ight 50 W (24 V AC/DC), 460 VA (230 V AC),, minimal 1 V/1 ma Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 http Additional technical data at: 90 Article number

91 IGHT Presence detectors 24 V Detection area (square) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) 2 m 9 m² 3.0 m x 3.0 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m ± 0.5 m A 0.8 ux 2.5 m 16 m² 4.0 m x 4.0 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m ± 0.5 m B C 3 m 25 m² 5.0 m x 5.0 m 49 m² 7.0 m x 7.0 m ± 1.0 m 3.5 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m ± 1.0 m 4 Accessories QuickSet plus Art.o.: Details Page 234 clic Art.o.: Details Page 233 QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 Surface frame compact Art.o.: Details Page 232 Scale drawings 102, , Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 91

92 Presence detectors 24 V IGHT compact of ce 24V ux Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Square detection area Mixed light measurement The square detection area allows accurate and simple planning ight switch output (relay, oating) Automatic lighting control as well as analogue value output of measured brightness ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay Pulse function for staircase timer Analogue output 0 10 V for brightness inear or logarithmic output of brightness Can be used as light sensor for PC controls The analogue output exports the brightness measured by the internal sensor as an analogue signal. The output of the analogue signal can either be linear or logarithmic to the measured brightness. The output functions independently from the presence detector Test operation mode checks the detection area and installation The parameters can either be set using the potentiometer or via the optional service remote control QuickSet plus Product selection Installation typec Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) compact of ce 24V ux Ceiling installation ight 0 10 V 24 V AC/DC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) compact of ce 24V ux BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) compact of ce 24V ux SR further colours on request Technical data compact of ce 24V ux Operating voltage 24 V AC/DC Setting range lx Recommended installation height 2 3 m ight switch-off delay Impulse (0.5 s), 10 s 20 min ight contact type Floating relay Analogue output 0 10 V DC Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 Detection area (square) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) 2 m 9 m² 3.0 m x 3.0 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m ± 0.5 m A 0.8 ux 2.5 m 16 m² 4.0 m x 4.0 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m ± 0.5 m B C 3 m 25 m² 5.0 m x 5.0 m 49 m² 7.0 m x 7.0 m ± 1.0 m 3.5 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m ± 1.0 m http Additional technical data at: 92 Article number

93 IGHT Presence detectors 24 V Accessories QuickSet plus Art.o.: Details Page 234 clic Art.o.: Details Page 233 QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 Surface frame compact Art.o.: Details Page Scale drawings 102, , Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 93

94 Presence detectors 24 V IGHT compact passage 24V Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Rectangular detection range for corridors Mixed light measurement Automatic control of lighting and HVAC as well as room monitoring function ight switch output (relay, oating) Presence switch output (relay, oating) ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay Pulse function for staircase timer HVAC control with switch-on delay and switch-off delay Presence switch contact for HVAC control: The switching behaviour of the oating contact is only controlled by presence The switch-on delay prevents instantaneous switch on. The contact only closes on completion of the switch-on delay The sensitivity of the presence switch output is reduced in the "monitoring" position. The contact indicates the presence of people with a high degree of certainty Test operation mode checks the detection area and installation The parameters can either be set using the potentiometer or via the optional service remote control QuickSet plus Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number Ceiling installation ight Presence 24 V AC/DC pure white, (similar to RA 9010) c ompact passage 24V pure black, (similar to RA 9005) compact passage 24V BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) compact passage 24V SR Technical data compact passage 24V Operating voltage 24 V AC/DC Setting range lx Recommended installation height m ight switch-off delay Impulse (0.5 s), 10 s 20 min Presence switch-off delay 10 s 120 min Presence switch-on delay 0 s 10 min ight contact type Floating relay Presence contact type Floating relay Switching capacity Presence/ight 50 W (24 V AC/DC), 460 VA (230 V AC),, minimal 1 V/1 ma Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 http Additional technical data at: 94 Article number

95 IGHT Presence detectors 24 V Detection area (rectangular) Installation height (A) Head on to (r) Diagonally (t) 2 m 56 m² 16 m x 3.5 m ± 1 m 105 m² 30 m x 3.5 m ± 1 m A ux 2.5 m 72 m² 18 m x 4.0 m ± 1 m 120 m² 30 m x 4.0 m ± 1 m 3 m 90 m² 20 m x 4.5 m ± 1 m 135 m² 30 m x 4.5 m ± 1 m r t 3.5 m 100 m² 20 m x 5.0 m ± 1 m 150 m² 30 m x 5.0 m ± 1 m r t 4 Accessories QuickSet plus Art.o.: Details Page 234 clic Art.o.: Details Page 233 QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 Surface frame compact Art.o.: Details Page 232 Scale drawings compact passage 24V ,5 26, ,5 40, Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 95

96 Presence detectors 24 V IGHT ECO-IR V Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) Square detection area Genuine daylight measurement The square detection area allows accurate and simple planning ight switch output (relay, oating) Presence switch output (relay, oating) Automatic control of lighting and HVAC ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay HVAC control with separate switch-off delay The presence detector has "Genuine light measurement" and is only suitable for switching uorescent lamps (F/P). Presence switch contact for HVAC control: The switching behaviour of the oating contact is only controlled by presence. The parameters are set via the potentiometer Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) ECO-IR V Ceiling installation ight Presence 24 V AC/DC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) ECO-IR V BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) ECO-IR V SR further colours on request Technical data ECO-IR V Operating voltage 24 V AC/DC Setting range lx Recommended installation height m ight switch-off delay 2 min 15 min Presence switch-off delay 1 60 min ight contact type Floating relay Presence contact type Floating relay Switching capacity Presence/ight 50 W (24 V AC/DC), 460 VA (230 V AC),, minimal 1 V/1 ma Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 Detection area (square) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) 2 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m ± 0.5 m A 0.8 ux 2.5 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m ± 0.5 m B C 3 m 49 m² 7.0 m x 7.0 m 81 m² 9.0 m x 9.0 m ± 0.5 m 3.5 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m 100 m² 10.0 m x 10.0 m ± 1 m 4.0 m 121 m² 11.0 m x 11.0 m ± 1 m http Additional technical data at: 96 Article number

97 IGHT Presence detectors 24 V Accessories QuickFix round cover Art.o.: Details Page 233 QuickFix square cover Art.o.: Details Page 232 Surface frame ECO-IR 360 Art.o.: Details Page 232 Additional accessories s. p. 232 QuickFix concrete round cover Details Page 232 QuickFix concrete square cover Details Page 233 QuickFix concrete ushmounted box Details Page 233 QuickFix concrete ushmounted housing Details Page 233 QuickSafe Details Page Scale drawings ,5 46,3 21, ,5 37, ,5 Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 97

98 Presence detectors 24 V IGHT ECO-IR 180A-24V Description 4 Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) 180 detection area Genuine daylight measurement Automatic control of lighting and HVAC ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay HVAC control with separate switch-off delay ight switch output (relay, oating) Presence switch output (relay, oating) The presence detector has "Genuine light measurement" and is only suitable for switching uorescent lamps (F/P). Presence switch contact for HVAC control: The switching behaviour of the oating contact is only controlled by presence The parameters are set via the potentiometer Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number pure white, (similar to RA 9010) ECO-IR 180A-24V Wall installation ight Presence 24 V AC/DC pure black, (similar to RA 9005) ECO-IR 180A-24V BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) ECO-IR 180A-24V SR further colours on request Technical data ECO-IR 180A-24V Operating voltage 24 V AC/DC Setting range lx Recommended installation height m ight switch-off delay 2 min 15 min Presence switch-off delay min ight contact type Floating relay Presence contact type Floating relay Switching capacity Presence/ight 50 W (24 V AC/DC), 460 VA (230 V AC),, minimal 1 V/1 ma Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 Detection area (semicircular) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) m 32 m² 8 m x 4 m 100 m² Ø 16 m A B C http Additional technical data at: 98 Article number

99 IGHT Presence detectors 24 V Accessories QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 Surface frame ECO-IR 180 Art.o.: Details Page Scale drawings ECO-IR 180A-24V ,3 21, Connection example ECO-IR 180A-24V ECO-IR 180A-24V httpadditional technical data at: Article number 99

100 IGHT http Additional technical data at: Article number 100

101 Section overview IGHT Motion detector Outdoor Installation type Detection angle Detection range Channel amp loads ight switchoff delay: Remote operation Type Page Wall installation, internal corner and external corner installation m ight 1000 W 5 s 12 min UXA m ight 1000 W 5 s 12 min UXA Wall installation, internal corner and external corner installation m ight m ight 120 W ( 150 W) 400 W ( 500 W) 5 s 12 min UXA /150W s 12 min UXA /500W Wall and ceiling installation, internal corner and external corner installation 360 Ø 32 m ight 1000 W 5 s 12 min UXA m ight 2300 W 1 s 20 min SPHIX m ight 2300 W 1 s 20 min SPHIX Indoor m ight 2300 W 1 s 20 min SPHIX Ceiling installation 360 Ø 7 m ight 1000 W 5 s 20 min UXA ight Presence 1000 W 5 s 20 min UXA /2 110 Surface mounted ceiling installation 360 Ø 7 m ight 1000 W 5 s 20 min UXA AP 112 ight Presence 1000 W 5 s 20 min UXA /2 AP 112 Flush-mounted wall installation m ight 1000 W 20 s 30 min UXA W 20 s 30 min UXA T 114 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 101

102 Motion detector Outdoor IGHT Motion detector wall installation UXA UXA Description Common functions Passive infrared motion detector (PIR) For outdoor use Automatic lighting control based on presence and brightness Additional creep under protection Sensor head can be turned by ± 90 horizontally and by 40 downwards Mixed light measurement suitable for the control of uorescent, incandescent and halogen lamps Single-handed plug-in installation with unloosable screws Instant start-up possible via factory preset Adjustable brightness switching value and switch-off delay Sensitivity can be reduced to limit detection area Controls are place protected UXA detection angle UXA detection angle Product selection Installation type Detection angle Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number Wall installation, internal corner and external corner installation with accessories ight 230 V AC White UXA Black UXA White UXA Black UXA Technical data UXA UXA Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency Hz Power consumption 8 VA Setting range lx umber of channels 1 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), Switching capacity light 6 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6), 3 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.3) Detection angle ight switch-off delay 5 s 12 min Incandescent lamp load 1000 W http Additional technical data at: Article number

103 IGHT Motion detector Outdoor UXA UXA Fluorescent lamp load ➀ not corrected 900 VA Flourescent lamp load ➀ parallel-corrected 200 VA Flourescent lamp load ➀ series-corrected 900 VA Flourescent lamp load ➁ 200 VA Ambient temperature 25 C +45 C Protection class II in accordance to E Protection rating IP 55 ➀ conventional ballast, ➁ electronic ballast Detection range m 2,5 m m 2,5 m 12 m 12 m Walking diagonally to the detector Walking head on to the detector Creep under protection Installation height 2.5 m Accessories Scale drawings UXA corner angle black, Art.o.: Details Page 234 UXA corner angle white, Art.o.: Details Page 234 RC lter, Art.o: Details Page Connection example D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 perm. O AUTO M httpadditional technical data at: Article number 103

104 Motion detector Outdoor IGHT Motion detector with halogen spotlight UXA /150W UXA /500W 5 Description Common functions Passive infrared motion detector (PIR) For outdoor use Integrated halogen spotlight for extensive lighting Energy saving ecohalogen light bulb with energy ef cient class C (R7s socket) included 150 detection angle Automatic lighting control based on presence and brightness Spotlight can be swivelled ± 45 horizontaly, and adjusted 60 upwards and 30 downwards using screw xings Additional creep under protection Sensor head can be turned by ± 90 horizontally and by 40 downwards Instant start-up possible via factory preset Single-handed plug-in installation with unloosable screws Controls are placed protected Additional light switch output (relay 230 V AC) Mixed light measurement suitable for the control of uorescent, incandescent and halogen lamps Spotlight with tough aluminium die-cast housing Adjustable brightness switching value and switch-off delay Sensitivity can be reduced to limit detection area UXA /150W 120 W ecohalogen spotlight (comparable with regular 150 W spotlight) UXA /500W 400 W ecohalogen spotlight (comparable with regular 500 W spotlight) Product selection Installation type Channel Operating voltage Colour Type Article number Wall installation, internal corner and external corner installation with accessories ight 230 V AC White UXA /150W Black UXA /150W White UXA /500W Black UXA /500W Technical data UXA /150W UXA /500W Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency Hz Power consumption 8 VA Power consumption lx Switching capacity ight 8 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 6 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6), 3 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.3) http Additional technical data at: Article number

105 IGHT Motion detector Outdoor UXA /150W UXA /500W ight switch-off delay 5 s 12 min umber of channels 1 Halogen spotlight 120 W Eco ( 150 W) 400 W Eco ( 500 W) Additonal incandescent/halogen lamp load 500 W Ambient temperature 25 C +45 C Protection class I in accordance with E Protection rating IP 55 Detection range Connection example m 2,5 m 12 m Walking diagonally to the detector Walking head on to the detector Creep under protection Installation height 2.5 m Accessories UXA corner angle white Only for UXA /150W Art.o.: Details Page 234 UXA corner angle black Only for UXA /150W Art.o.: Details Page 234 RC lter Art.o.: Details Page 232 Scale drawings UXA /150W UXA /500W httpadditional technical data at: Article number 105

106 Motion detector Outdoor IGHT UXA Description 5 Product selection Passive infrared motion detector (PIR) For installation on walls and ceilings 360 detection angle Automatic lighting control based on presence and brightness Mixed light measurement suitable for the control of uorescent, incandescent and halogen lamps Single-handed plug-in installation with unloosable screws Instant start-up possible via factory preset Adjustable brightness switching value and switch-off delay Sensitivity can be reduced to limit detection area Sensor head can be adjusted vertically by 90 upwards or 70 downwards, thus allowing universal installation Creep under protection Detection range can be limited using enclosed segments Screwless terminals for quick installation Installation type Detection angle Channel Incandescent lamp load Wall and ceiling mounted, internal corner and external corner installation Operating voltage Type Article number 360 ight 1000 W 230 V AC UXA Technical data Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency Hz Power consumption 8 VA Setting range lx umber of channels 1 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) Switching capacity light 6 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) 3 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.3) Detection angle 360 ight switch-off delay 5 s 12 min Incandescent lamp load 1000 W ➀ conventional ballast, ➁ electronic ballast UXA Fluorescent lamp load ➀ not corrected 900 VA Flourescent lamp load ➀ parallel-corrected 200 VA Flourescent lamp load ➀ series-corrected 900 VA Flourescent lamp load ➁ 200 VA Ambient temperature 15 C +45 C Protection class II in accordance to E Protection rating IP 55 Detection range Scale drawings 144,3 92, m 80 65,7 16 m Walking diagonally to the detector Walking head on to the detector Installation height 2.5 m http Additional technical data at: Article number

107 IGHT Motion detector Outdoor Accessories UXA corner angle white Art.o.: Details Page 234 RC lter Art.o.: Details Page 232 Connection example UXA UXA D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 UXA UXA D1 D2 perm. O AUTO O OFF D1 D2 M httpadditional technical data at: Article number 107

108 Motion detector Outdoor IGHT Motion detector wall, ceiling, or corner installation 5 Description Passive infrared motion detector (PIR) Wall and ceiling installation Automatic lighting control based on presence and brightness Sensor head can be adjusted horizontally by ± 90, vertically by 90 upwards and 25 downwards Additional creep under protection Detection range can be limited using enclosed segments. Mixed light measurement suitable for the control of uorescent, incandescent and halogen lamps Instant start-up possible via factory preset A cover plate protects controls against manipulation Single-handed plug-in installation with unloosable screws RC 105 pro, service remote control (optional) RC 105, user remote control (optional) Adjustable brightness switching value and switch-off delay Zero-cross switching Teach-in of current brightness value possible via remote control Imulse function Test function SPHIX detection angle Especially suitable for narrow courtyard entrances, house entrances or paths Internal corner installation with optional corner installation bracket SPHIX detection angle Particularly suitable for sides of properties, entrances and drives SPHIX detection angle Corner installation bracket for internal or external corners included in delivery Especially suitable for external corner installation for simultaneous coverage of two facades via corner Product selection Installation type Detection angle Channel Incandescent lamp load 110 Operating voltage Type Article number SPHIX Wall and ceiling mounted, internal corner and external corner installation 220 SPHIX ight 2300 W 230 V AC 300 SPHIX Technical data SPHIX SPHIX SPHIX Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency Hz Power consumption 8 VA Setting range lx umber of channels 1 16 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), Switching capacity light 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6), 8 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.3) Detection angle ight switch-off delay 1 s 20 min Incandescent lamp load 2300 W http Additional technical data at: Article number

109 IGHT Motion detector Outdoor SPHIX SPHIX SPHIX Fluorescent lamp load ➀ not corrected 900 VA Flourescent lamp load ➀ parallel-corrected 400 VA Flourescent lamp load ➀ series-corrected 900 VA Flourescent lamp load ➁ 400 VA Compact energy saving lamps 9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W Ambient temperature 25 C +55 C Protection class II in accordance to E Protection rating IP 55 ➀ conventional ballast, ➁ electronic ballast Detection range ,5 m 5 m 220 2,5 m 5 m 15 m 15 m Walking diagonally to the detector Walking head on to the detector Creep under protection Installation height 2.5 m m 10 m 30 m Accessories SPHIX RC 105 Art.o.: Details Page 235 SPHIX RC 105 Pro Art.o.: Details Page 235 SPHIX corner angle Art.o.: Details Page 235 RC lter Art.o.: Details Page 232 Scale drawings Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 109

110 Motion detector Indoor IGHT Installation type Ceiling installation, ush-mounted 5 Description Small, inconspicuous passive infrared motion detector (PIR) Ceiling installation for suspended ceilings Automatic lighting control based on presence and brightness Mixed light measurement suitable for the control of uorescent, incandescent and halogen lamps Sensor head can be adjusted downwards by 45 in 15 stages thus allowing detection area to be changed to avoid switching the device on unnecessarily Ceiling cut-out of mm diameter Easy installation via two clamping brackets System consists of power box and sensor with plugged connection cable Sensor can easily be removed during painting work arge clamping area for quick installation Single-handed plug-in installation with unloosable screws Instant start-up possible via factory preset o unintentional adjustment due to covered up controls Adjustable brightness switching value and switch-off delay Sensitivity can be reduced to limit detection area Impulse function Test function UXA channel UXA /2 2 channel 2. Relay for HVAC control with adjustable switch-off delay, presence-dependent, potential-free Product selection Installation type Detection angle Channel Incandescent lamp load Ceiling installation 360 Operating voltage Type Article number ight UXA W 230 V AC ight Presence UXA / Technical data UXA UXA /2 Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency Hz Power consumption 8 VA Setting range lx umber of channels 1 2 Switching capacity light 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 3 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.3) Presence switching capacity 5 A (cos = 1) 250 V AC or 24 V DC Detection angle 360 Recommended installation height 2 3 m ight switch-off delay 5 s 20 min Presence switch-off delay 10 s/15 min/30 min/60 min (in nitely variable) Incandescent lamp load 1000 W Flourescent lamp load ➀ parallel-corrected 400 VA Ambient temperature +0 C +45 C Protection class II in accordance to E Protection rating Sensor IP 40, power unit IP 20 ➀ conventional ballast http Additional technical data at: Article number

111 IGHT Motion detector Indoor Detection range Accessories RC lter Art.o.: Details Page m 3,5 m Walking diagonally to the detector Walking head on to the detector Installation height 2.5 m Scale drawings Ø Connection example UXA UXA /2 D1 D2 M httpadditional technical data at: Article number 111

112 Motion detector Indoor IGHT Installation type Surface mount on ceiling 5 Description Passive infrared motion detector (PIR) for ceiling installation Automatic lighting control based on presence and brightness Mixed light measurement suitable for the control of uorescent, incandescent and halogen lamps Instant start-up possible via factory preset o unintentional adjustment due to covered up controls Adjustable brightness switching value and switch-off delay Sensitivity can be reduced to limit detection area Impulse function Test function Single-handed plug-in installation with unloosable screws UXA AP 1 channel UXA /2 AP 2 channel 2. Relay for HVAC control, presence dependent, potential-free HVAC control with programmable switch-off delay Product selection Installation type Detection angle Channel Incandescent lamp load Surface mounted on ceiling 360 Operating voltage Type Article number ight 1000 W 230 V AC UXA AP ight Presence 1000 W 230 V AC UXA /2 AP Technical data UXA AP UXA /2 AP Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency Hz Power consumption 5 VA Setting range lx umber of channels 1 2 Switching capacity light 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 3 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.3) Presence switching capacity 5 A (cos = 1) 250 V AC or 24 V DC Detection angle 360 Recommended installation height 2 3 m ight switch-off delay 5 s 20 min Presence switch-off delay 10 s 60 min (in nitely variable) Incandescent lamp load 1000 W Flourescent lamp load ➀ parallel-corrected 400 VA Ambient temperature +0 C +45 C Protection class II in accordance to E Protection rating IP 40 ➀ conventional ballast http Additional technical data at: Article number

113 IGHT Motion detector Indoor Detection range Accessories RC lter Art.o.: Details Page m 3,5 m Walking diagonally to the detector Walking head on to the detector Installation height 2.5 m Scale drawings Connection example 5 Ø 122 UXA AP UXA /2 AP D2 D1 M httpadditional technical data at: Article number 113

114 Motion detector Indoor IGHT Motion detector wall installation 5 Description Passive infrared motion detector (PIR) for wall installation Compatible with branded switches, replaces conventional light switches Automatic lighting control based on presence and brightness Instant start-up possible via factory preset o unintentional adjustment due to covered up controls Adjustable brightness switching value and switch-off delay Sensitivity can be reduced to limit detection area Pulse function Test function Detection range can be limited using enclosed segments. Manual AUTO/O/OFF switching by simple adjustment of cover ap Teach-in of current brightness value Expansion of detection area through integrated master/slave or master/master function when using up to 10 devices UXA Mixed light measurement suitable for the control of uorescent, incandescent and halogen lamps With acoustic advance shut-off warning 15 seconds before light switches off UXA T ike UXA , however: 2 wire connection, ideal for retro tting ight switch output (triac, 230 V AC) Advance shut-off warning through dimming 15 seconds before light switches off Mixed light measurement suitable for incandescent and halogen lamps (no electronic ballast) Product selection Installation type Detection angle Channel Incandescent lamp load Flush-mounted wall installation 200, circular ight Operating voltage Type Article number 1000 W UXA V AC 400 W UXA T Technical data UXA UXA T Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Power consumption 6 VA Setting range lx umber of channels 1 Switching capacity light 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 3 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.3) 2 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) Detection angle 200, circular Recommended installation height m ight switch-off delay 20 s 30 min Incandescent lamp load 1000 W 400 W Flourescent lamp load ➀ parallel-corrected 400 VA Ambient temperature +0 C +45 C Protection class II in accordance to E Protection rating IP 40 ➀ conventional ballast http Additional technical data at: Article number

115 8 m P T P T IGHT Motion detector Indoor Detection range Accessories RC lter Art.o.: Details Page 232 Surface frame UXA Art.o.: Details Page m Walking diagonally to the detector Walking head on to the detector Installation height m Scale drawings ,5 33,5 50 Connection example UXA UXA UXA T UXA T T T httpadditional technical data at: Article number 115

116 IGHT 116

117 Section overview IGHT Twilight switch umber of channels Setting range Switch on delay On/off switching delay separate External outputs PC interface Program Connection type Type Page Analogue, DI rail lx 20 s Terminal screws UA lx 60 s DuoFix screwless terminals UA lx 0 20 min DuoFix screwless terminals UA Digital without timer, DI rail lx 0 59 min 1 DuoFix Screwless terminals UA 111 top lx 0 59 min 2 DuoFix Screwless terminals UA 112 top2 118 Digital with timer, DI rail lx 0 59 min 1 Weekly program DuoFix Screwless terminals UA 121 top2 RC lx 0 59 min 2 Weekly program DuoFix Screwless terminals UA 122 top2 RC 120 Analogue with timer, DI rail lx 0 59 min Weekly program DuoFix Screwless terminals UA 120 top2 120 Analogue without timer, wall installation or mast installation lx 40 s lx s lx s Analogue with timer, wall installation or mast installation Terminal screws Terminal screws Terminal screws UA 126 star with adapter plate 122 UA 127 star 122 UA 128 star lx 0 10 min Daily program Terminal screws UA 129 star-time

118 Twilight switch Analogue, DI rail IGHT Twilight switch UA 108 UA 109 UA Description UA 108 Analogue twilight switch External surface or ush-mounted light sensor included in delivery In nitely adjustable switching brightness Fixed On and Off switching delay Display of channel and switching status UA 109 ike UA 108, however: DuoFix spring terminals Test function UA 110 ike UA 109, however: Adjustable On and Off switching delay Extended brightness levels and adjustable delay Five adjustable brightness levels for simple setting of lux value Zero-cross switching Permanent OFF and permanent O function can be set on the potentiometer Product selection Setting range Switch on/off delay lx 20 s lx 60 s lx 0 20 min * available October 2010 Connection type Operating voltage Sensor (included) Terminal screws DuoFix screwless terminals DuoFix screwless terminals V AC V AC V AC V UC Surface-mounted light sensor Flush-mounted light sensor Surface-mounted light sensor Flush-mounted light sensor Surface-mounted light sensor Flush-mounted light sensor Surface-mounted light sensor Protection rating Type Article number IP 20, Sensor IP 54 IP 20, Sensor IP 65 IP 20, Sensor IP 55 IP 20, Sensor IP 65 IP 20, Sensor IP 55 IP 20, Sensor IP 65 IP 20, Sensor IP 55 UA 108 A UA 108 E UA 109 A UA 109 E UA 110 A UA 110 E UA 110 A 24V * http Additional technical data at: Article number

119 IGHT Twilight switch Analogue, DI rail Technical data UA 108 UA 109 UA 110 UA 110 A 24V Operating voltage V AC V UC Frequency Hz Width 1 module 2 modules Power consumption 6 VA 3 VA Setting range lx lx lx Switch-on delay 20 s 60 s 0 20 min Type of contact O contact Changeover contact Switch output potential free potential free, not for SEV Switching capacity 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1) 10 AX (Fluorescent lamp load) 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1) 16 AX (Fluorescent lamp load) 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1) 10 AX (Fluorescent lamp load) Min. switching capacity 10 ma Incandescent lamp load 2300 W 3600 W 1400 W Fluorescent lamp load ➀ not corrected 2300 VA 3600 VA 1400 VA Fluorescent lamp load ➀ series-corrected: 2300 VA 3600 VA 1400 VA Fluorescent lamp load ➀ lead-lag circuit 2300 VA 3600 VA 1400 VA Compact energy saving lamps 9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W 34 x 7 W, 27 x 11 W, 24 x 15 W, 22 x 23 W Ambient temperature 25 C +50 C 30 C +55 C Protection class II in accordance with E Maximum cable length to sensor 25 m 100 m (2 x 1.5 mm 2 ) ➀ conventional 5 x 7 W, 4 x 11 W, 4 x 15 W, 4 x 20 W, 4 x 23 W 6 Accessories Wall mounting kit 17.5 mm For UA 108 Art.o.: Details Page 230 Wall mounting kit 35 mm For UA 109, UA 110 Art.o.: Details Page 230 Front panel kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 Additional accessories Surface-mounted light sensor Details Page 235 Analogue surface-mounted light sensor Details Page 236 Analogure ush-mounted light sensor Details Page 236 Connection example UA 108 UA 109, UA max. 25 m max. 100 m C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 119

120 Twilight switch Digital without timer, DI rail IGHT Twilight switch UA 111 top2 UA 112 top2 6 Description UA 111 top2 Digital twilight switch/lighting control device Switching brightness digitally adjustable Adjustable On and Off switching delay Switching brightness and switching delay can be set separately for switching On and Off Onscreen display of channel and switching status as well as current lux value DuoFix spring terminals Zero-cross switching Up to 4 sensors can be attached Up to 10 devices can be connected to a digital sensor Interface for OBEISK top2 memory card (PC programming) External light sensor included in delivery Extended brightness range Permanent O/OFF switching Test function Switching preselection Display lighting PI coding External control input Operating hours counter UA 112 top2 ike UA 111 top2, however: 2 channels 2 external control inputs Channel-independent hours counter Product selection umber of channels External outputs Switch on delay Switching capacity at 250 V AC 0 59 min 16 A (10 AX) Sensor (included) Type Article number Surface-mounted light sensor Flush-mounted light sensor Surface-mounted light sensor Flush-mounted light sensor UA 111 top2 A UA 111 top2 E UA 112 top2 A UA 112 top2 E http Additional technical data at: Article number

121 IGHT Twilight switch Digital without timer, DI rail Technical data UA 111 top2 UA 112 top2 Operating voltage V AC V AC Frequency Hz Width 2 modules 3 modules Power consumption 3 VA Setting range lx Switch-on delay 0 59 min Type of contact Changeover contact 2 Changeover contacts Switch output potential free, not for SEV Switching capacity 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 10 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6), 10 AX (Fluorescent lamp load) Min. switching capacity 10 ma Incandescent lamp load 2600 W Fluorescent lamp load ➀ not corrected 2300 VA Fluorescent lamp load ➀ series-corrected 2300 VA Fluorescent lamp load ➀ lead-lag circuit 2300 VA Compact energy saving lamps 22 x 7 W, 18 x 11 W, 16 x 15 W, 16 x 20 W, 14 x 23 W Ambient temperature 30 C +55 C Protection class II in accordance with E Maximum cable length to sensor 100 m (2 x 1.5 mm 2 ) ➀ conventional 6 Accessories OBEISK top2 PC set Art.o.: Details Page 229 Memory card OBEISK top2 Art.o.: Details Page 230 Front panel kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 Additional accessories Digital surface-mounted light sensor Details Page 236 Digital ush-mounted light sensor Details Page 234 Wall mounting kit 35 mm Details Page 230 Wall mounting kit 52.5 mm Details Page 230 Connection example UA 111 top2 UA 112 top2 Ext1 ux C2 ux max. 100 m + Data max. 100 m max. 100 m max. 100 m Ext1 Ext2 + Data max. 100 m C1 C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 121

122 Twilight switch Digital Analogue/digital with timer, with DI timer, rail, analogue DI rail with timer IGHT Twilight switch with time switch UA 120 top2 UA 121 top2 RC UA 122 top2 RC 6 Description Common functions Twilight switch with integrated weekly timer Adjustable On and Off switching delay Switching brightness and switching delay can be set separately for switching On and Off Fixed O and OFF times (e.g. night time interruption) DuoFix spring terminals Zero-cross switching Interface for OBEISK top2 memory card (PC programming) External light sensor included in delivery Permanent O/OFF switching Test function Switching preselection Display lighting PI coding Operating hours counter Onscreen display of channel and switching status Holiday and public holiday program with yearly function for xed and public holidays dependent on Easter Different summer/winter time rules can be selected or freely de ned UA 120 top2 Analogue twilight switch 1 channel Analogue adjustable switching brightness UA 121 top2 RC Digital twilight switch/lighting control 1 channel DCF77 or GPS radio controlled time via external antenna External control input Switching brightness digitally adjustable Variable lux values can be set for each day Up to 4 sensors can be attached Up to 10 devices can be connected to a digital sensor Extended brightness range 2 special programmes with yearly function UA 122 top2 RC ike UA 121 top2 RC, however: 2 channels Channel-independent operating hour counter 2 external control inputs Product selection umber of channels External outputs Special program V AC 1 1 Yearly program V AC 2 2 Yearly program V AC http Operating voltage Sensor (included) Protection rating Type Article number Surface-mounted light sensor Flush-mounted light sensor Surface-mounted light sensor Flush-mounted light sensor Surface-mounted light sensor Flush-mounted light sensor Additional technical data at: IP 20, Sensor IP 55 UA 120 top2 A IP 20, Sensor IP 65 UA 120 top2 E IP 20, Sensor IP 55 UA 121 top2 RC A IP 20, Sensor IP 66 UA 121 top2 RC E IP 20, Sensor IP 55 UA 122 top2 RC A IP 20, Sensor IP 66 UA 122 top2 RC E Article number

123 IGHT Twilight switch Digital with Analogue/digital timer, DI rail, analogue with timer, with DI timer rail Technical data UA 120 top2 UA 121 top2 RC UA 122 top2 RC Operating voltage V AC V AC V AC Frequency Hz Width 3 modules 2 modules 3 modules Power consumption 3 VA Setting range lx lx Switch-on delay 0 59 min Type of contact Changeover contact Changeover contact 2 Changeover contacts Switch output potential free, not for SEV Switching capacity 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 10 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6), 10 AX (Fluorescent lamp load) Min. switching capacity 10 ma Incandescent lamp load 2600 W Fluorescent lamp load ➀ not corrected 2300 VA Fluorescent lamp load ➀ lead-lag circuit 2300 VA Compact energy saving lamps 22 x 7 W, 18 x 11 W, 16 x 15 W, 16 x 20 W, 14 x 23 W Ambient temperature 30 C +55 C Protection class II in accordance with E ➀ conventional 6 Accessories OBEISK top2 PC set Art.o.: Details Page 229 Memory card OBEISK top2 Art.o.: Details Page 230 Additional accessories top2 RC DCF antenna Details Page 228 Antenna top2 RC-GPS Details Page 228 Power unit top2 GPS Details Page 229 Additional accessories ight sensors Details Page 236 Wall mounting kit 35 mm Details Page 230 Wall mounting kit 52.5 mm Details Page 230 Front panel kit Details Page 228 Connection example UA 120 top2 UA 121 top2 RC UA 122 top2 RC Ext1 ux max. 100 m C2 ux max. 100 m C max. 100 m max. 100 m C Data RC DCF max. 100 m max. 100 m Ext1 Ext2 C Data RC DCF httpadditional technical data at: Article number 123

124 Twilight switch Surface-mounted IGHT Surface-mounted twilight switch UA 126 star UA 129 star-time 6 Description UA 126 star Analogue twilight switch with integrated light sensor Cable feed from the back and from below Unloosable screws arge terminal area Brightness value can be set without opening the device arge light exposure angle (approx. 180 degrees) In nitely adjustable switching brightness Test button Fixed On and Off switching delay UA 127 star ike UA 126 star, however: Adjustable On and Off switching delay UA 128 star ike UA 126 star, however: Adjustable On and Off switching delay Expanded brightness range UA 129 star-time Digital twilight switch with integrated light sensor and time function for freelyprogrammable night switch-off (daily program) Adjustable On and Off switching delay Easy programming philosophy Preset night switch-off (23.00 OFF/5.00 O), lux values and switch delay Automatic summer/winter time changeover Cable feed from the back and from below Unloosable screws arge terminal area Brightness value can be set without opening the device Integrated replaceable lithium battery enables programming before installation arge light exposure angle (approx. 180 degrees) Switching brightness and switching delay can be set digitally for switching On and Off separately Test button Time function can be deactivated Product selection Setting range Switch-on delay Switching capacity at 230 V AC Additional program Type Article number lx 40 s 10 A (6 AX) UA 126 star lx 40 s 10 A (6 AX) UA 126 star * lx s 16 A (10 AX) UA 127 star lx s 16 A (10 AX) UA 128 star lx 0 10 min 16 A (10 AX) integrated time switch UA 129 star-time * Adapter plate included http Additional technical data at: Article number

125 IGHT Twilight switch Surface-mounted Technical data UA 126 star UA 127 star UA 128 star UA 129 star-time Operating voltage V AC Frequency Hz Power consumption 3.5 VA 4.5 VA 2 VA Setting range lx lx lx lx Switch-on delay 40 s s 0 10 min Type of contact O contact Switch output 230 V Switching capacity 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) 6 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) 16 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 10 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) Incandescent lamp load 1000 W 2300 W Fluorescent lamp load ➀ not corrected 1000 VA 2300 VA Fluorescent lamp load ➀ series-corrected 1000 VA 2300 VA Fluorescent lamp load ➀ lead-lag circuit 1000 VA 2300 VA Compact energy saving lamps 4 x 7 W, 3 x 11 W, 3 x 15 W, 3 x 20 W, 3 x 23 W 9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W Ambient temperature 35 C +55 C Protection class II in accordance with E Protection rating IP 55 ➀ conventional 6 Accessories Scale drawings Adapter plate UA star (included with ) Art.o.: Details Page ,4 118,4 Connection example UA 126 star, UA 127 star, UA 128 star UA 129 star-time httpadditional technical data at: Article number 125

126 IGHT 126

127 Section overview IGHT Staircase time switch DI-rail, electronic Time Setting range Push button input Multivoltage input Switch-off pre-warning ong-time function Zero-cross switching o standby consumption 60 min EPA Type Page 60 min EPA min 150 ma EPA EPA DI-rail, electro-mechanical DI rail, Switch-off pre-warning 1 7 min 50 ma EPA EPA s EPA Flush-mounted 60 min EPA min 30 ma EPA

128 Staircase time switch DI-rail, electronic IGHT Staircase time switch electronic EPA 1 EPA 6 EPA 3 7 Description Common functions Staircase time switch, electronic Terminal layout same as EPA 8 Extremely accurate Push button input with electronic overload protection Automatic 3 or 4 conductor detection (4 conductor with connection for oor lighting) EPA 1 Zero-cross switching to preserve relay and lamp Multi-functional device with 10 available functions, set at the front of the device Additional multi-voltage input electrically isolated for AC/DC V, e.g. für intercoms Advance shut-off warning (two double ashes) in accordance with DI to avoid sudden darkness. Extended function activated via long button press. Immediate secondary switching (staircase time switch) or prematurely switched off (impulse switch with switch-off delay). Electronic impulse switch Permanent light EPA 6 ike EPA 1, however: Without multi-voltage input EPA 3 Additional multi-voltage input electrically isolated for AC/DC V, e.g. for intercoms Immediate secondary switching Toggle switch for permanent light EPA 7 ike EPA 3, however: Without multi-voltage input Product selection Incandescent lamp load 3600 W 2300 W Multi-function Multi-voltage input Switch-off pre-warning 3/4 conductors Crossover switch Type Article number Automatic EPA Automatic EPA Automatic EPA Automatic EPA http Additional technical data at: Article number

129 IGHT Staircase time switch DI-rail, electronic Technical data EPA 1 EPA 6 EPA 3 EPA 7 Operating voltage V AC Frequency Hz Width 1 module Power consumption 6 VA Glow lamp load 150 ma Setting range min 3/4 conductors Automatic Type of contact O contact Switch output on- oating (230 V) Incandescent lamp load 3600 W 2300 W Flourescent lamp load ➀ lead-lag circuit 3600 VA 2300 VA Flourescent lamp load ➀ parallel-corrected 1200 VA, (120 F) 400 VA, (42 F) Compact energy saving lamps 34 x 7 W, 27 x 11 W, 24 x 15 W, 22 x 23 W 9 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 7 x 15 W, 7 x 20 W, 7 x 23 W Switching capacity 16 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) 16 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) Test approvals V Ambient temperature 25 C +50 C Protection class II in accordance with E Protection rating IP 20 ➀ conventional 16 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) 10 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) 7 Accessories Connection example Wall mounting kit 17.5 mm Art.o.: Details Page 230 Front panel kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 EPA 1, EPA 3 + AC/DC V B2 B max. 150 ma Connection example EPA 1, EPA 3 EPA 6, EPA 7 EPA 6, EPA 7 + AC/DC V B2 B max. 150 ma 4 max. 150 ma 4 max. 150 ma http Additional technical data at: Article number 129

130 Staircase time switch DI-rail, electro-mechanical, switch-off pre-warning IGHT Staircase time switch electro-mechanical EPA 8 EPA 9 EPA 4 7 Description EPA 8 Staircase time switch, electromechanical o stand-by consumption Reliable due to synchronous motor drive Simple time setting and direct delay time readout on scale Precision mechanics and therefore exact switching period Very low sensitivity to interference Toggle switch for permanent light O 4-wire with connection for oor lighting 3-wire without oor lighting retriggerable EPA 9 ike EPA 8, however: 3-wire connection and oor lighting, but without secondary switching (no longer permitted for new systems) Terminal layout same as EPA 8 EPA 4 Switch-off pre-warning Additional device for staircase time switch EPA 3/EPA 8 or other brands Suitable for switching incandescent lamps and 230 V AC halogen lamps After the lighting period set on the staircase time switch EPA 3/EPA 8 has expired, EPA 4 switches to reduced brightness (approx. 50 %) Product selection Incandescent lamp load 2300 W Setting range o standby consumption Switch-off pre-warning 3/4 conductors Secondary switching Type Article number Yes After 30 s E PA min Only 3 conductor o E PA s Immediate EPA http Additional technical data at: Article number

131 IGHT Staircase time switch DI-rail, electro-mechanical, switch-off pre-warning Technical data EPA 8 EPA 9 EPA 4 Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Hz Width 1 module Power consumption 1 VA Glow lamp load 50 ma Setting range 1 7 min s 3/4 conductors Yes Only 3 conductor Type of contact O contact Switch output 230 V Flourescent lamp load ➀ lead-lag circuit 2300 VA Flourescent lamp load ➀ parallel-corrected 1300 VA, (70 F) Compact energy saving lamps 9 x 7 W, 6 x 11 W, 5 x 15 W, 5 x 20 W Switching capacity 16 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) 10 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) Test approvals V Ambient temperature 10 C +50 C Protection class II in accordance with E Protection rating IP 20 ➀ conventional 7 Accessories Connection example Wall mounting kit 17.5 mm Art.o.: Details Page 228 Front panel kit Art.o.: Details Page 226 EPA max. 50 ma Connection example EPA 8 EPA 9 EPA EPA 4 max. 50 ma max. 50 ma 4 3 http Additional technical data at: Article number 131

132 Staircase time switch Flush-mounted IGHT Staircase time switch, Flush-mounted EPA 047 EPA 041 Description 7 EPA 047 Flush-mounted staircase time switch, electronic Suitable for retro tting and new installation Switch or push button connectable, i.e. existing switches can be used (e.g. when updating) Zero-cross circuit for the protection of the relay contact Push-button input with electronic overload protection Automatic 3 or 4 conductor detection (4 conductor with connection for oor lighting) Extremely accurate Immediate secondary switching EPA 041 ike EPA 047, however: Multi-functional device with 12 available functions, set at the front of the device Additional multi-voltage input electrically isolated for AC/DC V, e.g. for intercoms Advance shut-off warning (two double ashes) in accordance with DI to avoid sudden darkness 60 min. extended function activated via long button press Immediate secondary switching (staircase time switch) or prematurely switched off (impulse switch with switch-off delay). Can be connected via push-button or switch Product selection Incandescent lamp load 1800 W Multi-function Multi-voltage input Switch-off pre-warning 3/4 conductors Zero-cross switching Type Article number Automatic EPA Automatic EPA http Additional technical data at: Article number

133 IGHT Staircase time switch Flush-mounted Technical data EPA 047 EPA 041 Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency Hz Power consumption 2 VA Glow lamp load 30 ma Setting range min 3/4 conductors Automatic Type of contact O contact Switch output on- oating (230 V) Flourescent lamp load ➀ lead-lag circuit 1200 VA Flourescent lamp load ➀ parallel-corrected 580 VA, (54 F) Compact energy saving lamps 13 x 7 W, 7 x 11 W, 5 x 15 W, 5 x 20 W, 4 x 23 W Switching capacity 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 6 AX (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.3) Test approvals V Ambient temperature 25 C +45 C Protection class II in accordance with E Protection rating IP 20 ➀ conventional 7 Scale drawings EPA 041, EPA 047 Connection example EPA ,5 4 48,4 Connection example EPA 041 EPA AC/DC V 4 B2 * B3 B2 B3 with switch (cannot be used with three-way switch, multi-voltage input switch connection) httpadditional technical data at: Article number 133

134 CIMATE http Additional technical data at: Article number 134

135 Section overview CIMATE Clock thermostats Digital battery version Program Connection type Operating voltage Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC Type of contact Type Page 2/3 conductors 2 AA batteries 6 (1) A Two way switch RAMSES 811 top2 136 RAMSES 831 top2 136 RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set A 140 Weekly program Radio controlled 2 AA batteries 16 (2) A O contact RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set S 140 RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set (1) A Two way switch RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set Digital 230 V Weekly program 3/4 conductors 230 V AC 6 (1) A Two way switch RAMSES 812 top2 138 RAMSES 832 top2 138 OpenTherm Digital 230 V, DI-rail Weekly program 2 conductor (BUS) 230 V AC 8 (1) A 4 O contacts RAMSES 855 top2 OT Weekly program Terminal screws max. 4 mm² 230 V AC 10 (2) A Two way switch RAMSES 366/1 top 146 RAMSES 366/2 top 146 Analogue battery version Daily program 2/3 conductors 2 AA batteries 6 (1) A Two way switch RAMSES 784 S 148 Daily/weekly program 2/3 conductors 2 AA batteries 6 (1) A Two way switch RAMSES Analogue 230 V RAMSES 722 S 148 Daily program 3/4 conductors 230 V AC 6 (1) A Two way switch RAMSES 782 S 148 RAMSES Daily/weekly program 3/4 conductors 230 V AC 6 (1) A Two way switch RAMSES Daily program 3/4 conductors 230 V AC 6 (1) A Two way switch RAMSES Daily/weekly program 3/4 conductors 230 V AC 6 (1) A Two way switch RAMSES httpadditional technical data at: Article number 135

136 Clock thermostats Digital battery version CIMATE Digital clock thermostats battery version RAMSES 811 top2 RAMSES 831 top2 Description 8 Common functions Digital clock thermostat with a low pro le design for time-dependent monitoring and control of room temperature Battery version Suitable for energy-saving room temperature control in houses, apartments, heating zones, of ces, showrooms, factories, medical practices, holiday homes Required temperature set via the rotary dial IFO key for viewing important settings Quick start-up via 3 basic programs with individually changeable comfort and reduced temperature Party/ECO program Automatic summer/winter time adjustment Holiday program with reduction phase or date-controlled heating phase for holiday homes Different control types can be individually set Optimum start option thanks to operating point and switching differential setting option 24 programmable time phases per program also enable reduction phases during the day Plug-in base for wall or ush-mounted socket installation Optional pump protection function Optional feature to warn when boiler maintenance required RAMSES 811 top2 2 comfort and 2 reduced temperatures can be allocated to each phase RAMSES 831 top2 Illuminated display through keystroke External input for connection of presence detectors, temperature sensors, oor sensors, window contacts or telephone remote switches Optimisation function for automatic correction of heating start up 3 comfort and 2 reduction programs can be allocated to each phase Product selection Connection type Program Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC 2/3 conductors Weekly program 6 (1) A +6 C +30 C 2 AA batteries Setting range Operating voltage Type Article number RAMSES 811 top RAMSES 831 top http Additional technical data at: Article number

137 CIMATE Clock thermostats Digital battery version Technical data RAMSES 811 top2 RAMSES 831 top2 Operating voltage 2 AA batteries Type of contact Two way switch Max. switching capacity 6 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 1 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Adjustable temperature +6 C +30 C Time based on Quartz Program Weekly program, daily program, holiday program, 3 basic programs umber of memory cells 42, max. 24 per program Control types Pulse width modulation or hysteresis controller Control period 5 30 min Control capture range K Switch output Floating Time accuracy ± 1 s/day (Quartz) Power reserve Max. 10 min with no loss of time Battery life approx. 1 year, depending on switching frequency Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories 8 Actuator APHA 4 Art.o.: (230 V) Details Page 238 Art.o.: (24 V) Details Page 238 External temperature sensor 1 For RAMSES 831 top2 Art.o.: Details Page 237 External temperature sensor 2 For RAMSES 831 top2 Art.o.: Details Page 237 External temp. sensor IP 65 For RAMSES 831 top2 Art.o.: Details Page 237 Scale drawings Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 137

138 Clock thermostats Digital 230 V CIMATE Digital clock thermostat mains version RAMSES 812 top2 RAMSES 832 top2 Description 8 Common functions Digital clock thermostat with a low pro le design for time-dependent monitoring and control of room temperature Mains version Suitable for energy-saving room temperature control in houses, apartments, heating zones, of ces, showrooms, factories, medical practices, holiday homes Required temperature set via the rotary dial IFO key for viewing important settings Quick start-up via 3 basic programs with individually changeable comfort and reduced temperature Party/ECO program Automatic summer/winter time adjustment Different control types can be individually set Optimum start option thanks to operating point and switching differential setting option 24 programmable time phases per program also enable reduction phases during the day Plug-in base for wall or ush-mounted socket installation Holiday program with reduced temperature or date-controlled heating phase Optional pump protection function Optional feature to warn when boiler maintenance required RAMSES 812 top2 2 comfort and 2 reduction programs can be allocated to each phase RAMSES 832 top2 Illuminated display through keystroke External input for connection of presence detectors, temperature sensors, oor sensors, window contacts or telephone remote switches Optimisation function for automatic correction of heating start up 3 comfort and 2 reduction programs can be allocated to each phase Product selection Connection type Program Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC 3/4 conductors Weekly program 6 (1) A +6 C +30 C 230 V AC Setting range Operating voltage Type Article number RAMSES 812 top RAMSES 832 top http Additional technical data at: Article number

139 CIMATE Clock thermostats Digital 230 V Technical data RAMSES 812 top2 RAMSES 832 top2 Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Type of contact Two way switch Max. switching capacity 6 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 1 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Adjustable temperature +6 C +30 C Time based on Quartz Program Weekly program, daily program, holiday program, 3 basic programs umber of memory cells 42, max. 24 per program Control types Pulse width modulation or hysteresis controller Control period 5 30 min Control capture range K Switch output Floating Time accuracy ± 1 s/day (Quartz) Power reserve 5 hours Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories 8 Actuator APHA 4 Art.o.: (230 V) Details Page 238 Art.o.: (24 V) Details Page 238 External temperature sensor 1 For RAMSES 832 top2 Art.o.: Details Page 237 External temperature sensor 2 For RAMSES 832 top2 Art.o.: Details Page 237 External temp. sensor IP 65 For RAMSES 832 top2 Art.o.: Details Page 237 Scale drawings Connection example httpadditional technical data at: Article number 139

140 Clock thermostats Digital battery version CIMATE Digital clock thermostats radio controlled RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set A RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set S RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set 1 Description 8 Common functions Radio-controlled system for room temperature control The system consists of a digital clock thermostat and one receiver Suitable for energy-saving room temperature control in houses, apartments, heating zones, of ces, showrooms, factories, medical practices, holiday homes Required temperature set via the rotary dial IFO key for viewing important settings Quick start-up via 3 basic programs with individually changeable comfort and reduced temperature Party / ECO program Automatic summer/winter time adjustment Different control types can be individually set Optimum start option thanks to operating point and switching differential setting option 24 programmable time phases per program also enable reduction phases during the day 2 comfort and 2 reduction programs can be allocated to each phase Including base for free choice of position An optionally available plug-in base is required for wall installation Holiday program with reduced temperature or date-controlled heating phase Optional pump protection function Optional feature to warn when boiler maintenance required RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set A Consisting of a RAMSES 813 top2 HF and a REC 11receiver with an O contact 16(2) A/250 V AC for wall installation RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set S Consisting of a RAMSES 813 top2 HF and a REC 21 receiver as earthed intermediate connector with an O contact 16 (2) A/230 V AC RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set 1 Consisting of a RAMSES 813 top2 HF and a REC 1 receiver with a two-way switch 6 (2) A/250 V AC Product selection Connection type Program Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC Radio Weekly program Setting range Operating voltage Type Article number RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set A (2) A +6 C +30 C 2 AA batteries RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set S (1) A +6 C +30 C 2 AA batteries RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set http Additional technical data at: Article number

141 CIMATE Clock thermostats Digital battery version Technical data RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set A RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set S RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set 1 Operating voltage 2 AA batteries Type of contact O contact Two way switch Max. switching capacity 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 2 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) 6 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 1 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Adjustable temperature +6 C +30 C Time based on Quartz Program Weekly program, daily program, holiday program, 3 basic programs umber of memory cells 42, max. 24 per program Control types Pulse width modulation or hysteresis controller Control period 5 30 min Control capture range K Switch output Floating Time accuracy ± 1 s/day (Quartz) Power reserve Max. 10 min with no loss of time Battery life approx. 1 year, depending on switching frequency Width 5 modules Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Connection example 8 Socket RAMSES Details Page 238 Actuator APHA V Details Page 238 Actuator APHA 4 24 V Details Page 238 Antenna RAMSES 813/833 Details Page 237 RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set A C C1 RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set C C1 Scale drawings RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set A 80 30,8 RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set S RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set httpadditional technical data at: Article number 141

142 Clock thermostats Digital battery version CIMATE Digital clock thermostats radio controlled RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 1 RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 2 Description 8 Common functions Radio-controlled system for room temperature control The system consists of one or two digital clock thermostat and one receiver Suitable for energy-saving room temperature control in houses, apartments, heating zones, of ces, showrooms, factories, medical practices, holiday homes Required temperature set via the rotary dial IFO key for viewing important settings Quick start-up via 3 basic programs with individually changeable comfort and reduced temperature Party/ECO program Automatic summer/winter time adjustment Different control types can be individually set Optimum start option thanks to operating point and switching differential setting option 24 programmable time phases per program also enable reduction phases during the day Illuminated display through keystroke External input for connection of presence detectors, temperature sensors, oor sensors, window contacts or telephone remote switches (can only be used in connection with optional plug-in base for wall mounting) Optimisation function for automatic correction of heating start up Holiday program with reduction phase or date-controlled heating phase for holiday homes Optional feature to warn when boiler maintenance required Optional pump protection function 3 comfort and 2 reduction programs can be allocated to each phase. Including base for free choice of position An optionally available plug-in base is required for wall installation RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 1 Consisting of a RAMSES 833 top2 HF and a REC 1 receiver with a two-way switch 6 (2) A/250 V DC RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 2 Consisting of a RAMSES 833 top2 HF and a 2 channel REC 2 receiver with a two-way switch 6 (2) A/250 V DC per channel Product selection Connection type Program Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC Radio Weekly program 6 (1) A +6 C +30 C 2 AA batteries Setting range Operating voltage Type Article number RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set http Additional technical data at: Article number

143 CIMATE Clock thermostats Digital battery version Technical data RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 1 RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 2 Operating voltage 2 AA batteries Type of contact Two way switch Max. switching capacity 6 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 1 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Adjustable temperature +6 C +30 C Time based on Quartz Program Weekly program, daily program, holiday program, 3 basic programs umber of memory cells 42, max. 24 per program Control types Pulse width modulation or hysteresis controller Control period 5 30 min Control capture range K Switch output Floating Time accuracy ± 1 s/day (Quartz) Power reserve Max. 10 min with no loss of time Battery life approx. 1 year, depending on switching frequency Width 5 modules Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories 8 Actuator APHA V Art.o.: Details Page 238 Actuator APHA 4 24 V Art.o.: Details Page 238 External temperature sensor 1 Art.o.: Details Page 237 Additional accessories Antenna RAMSES 813/833 Details Page 237 External temp. sensor IP65 Details Page 237 External temperature sensor 2 Details Page 237 Socket RAMSES Details Page 238 Scale drawings RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 1, RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 2 Connection example RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 1 RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set C1 C1 C1 C1 C2 C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 143

144 Clock thermostats OpenTherm CIMATE RAMSES 855 top2 OT Description Digital heating control for time-dependent monitoring and control of room temperature Open Therm heating controller for 2 or 3 point control, weather-dependent, service water and circulation control Selector switch for 8 different types of connection/function Automatic sensor recognition for weather or room dependent control, can be switched manually at any time 3 different weekly programs 3 comfort and 2 reduced temperatures can be allocated to each phase. IFO button for the most important data RS 232 interface for GSM modem Additional switching program for service water utilisation times Adjustable service water storage temperature, programmable legionella protection Party/ECO program Holiday program with reduction phase or date-controlled heating phase for holiday homes Automatic summer/winter time correction Boiler/run up temperature (control circuit 1) controlled by switching the burner Feed temperature (control circuit 2) controlled via pump or mechanicallyadjustable mixer 3-point controller with feed sensor Time and temperature dependent control of hot water circulation pump. Pump protection function Hour counter for recording relay switching times e.g. burner running time. Settable reminder function for heater maintenance Inputs: External sensor (included in set), heating circuit feed sensor (included in set), feed or plunge sensor for service water, feed sensor for circulation 8 Product selection Connection type Program Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC Setting range Operating voltage Type Article number 2 conductor (BUS) Weekly program 8 (1) A +6 C +30 C 230 V AC RAMSES 855 top2 OT Technical data RAMSES 855 top2 OT Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency Hz Type of contact 4 O contacts Max. switching capacity 8 (1) A Adjustable temperature +6 C +30 C Feed temperature limit +40 C +90 C Connection type 2 conductor (BUS) Program Weekly program umber of memory cells 42, max. 24 per program Switching hysteresis 2 20 K Mixer runtime 2 10 min Switch output Floating Power reserve 4 hours Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E http Additional technical data at: Article number

145 CIMATE Clock thermostats OpenTherm Accessories Plunge sensor RAMSES Art.o.: Details Page 238 Flow temperature sensor Art.o.: Details Page 237 RAMSES OT Center Art.o.: Details Page 237 GSM modem Art.o.: Details Page 237 Scale drawings RAMSES 855 top2 OT Connection example RAMSES 855 top2 OT RAMSES 855 top2 OT RAMSES 855 top2 OT + OT-Center 8 RAMSES RAMSES + RAMSES OT-Box + Additional connection diagrams at httpadditional technical data at: Article number 145

146 Clock thermostats Digital 230 V, DI-rail CIMATE Digital clock thermostat zone control RAMSES 366/1 top RAMSES 366/2 top Description 8 Common functions Digital clock thermostat for timedependent control of room temperature Daily/weekly program can be set to the minute Date-controlled holiday program Programming displayed graphically by a bar arrangement in the CD Automatic summer/winter time adjustment Product selection Manual switching pre-selection and operation mode selector for: Automatic mode, comfort mode, reduction mode, frost protection mode PI coding Connection for telephone remote control for switching to comfort mode or frost protection mode ED display of active operating status as well as relay status RAMSES 366/1 top Zone control, 1 zone 1 external temperature sensor required RAMSES 366/2 top Zone control, 2 zones 2 external temperature sensors required umber of channels Program Max. switching capacity at 250 V AC Setting range Operating voltage Type Article number 1 Weekly program 10 (2) A +6 C +30 C 230 V AC RAMSES 366/1 top Weekly program 10 (2) A +6 C +30 C 230 V AC RAMSES 366/2 top http Additional technical data at: Article number

147 CIMATE Clock thermostats Digital 230 V, DI-rail Technical data RAMSES 366/1 top RAMSES 366/2 top Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency Hz Type of contact Two way switch Max. switching capacity 10 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 2 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Adjustable temperature +6 C +30 C Time based on Quartz Program Weekly program, daily program, holiday program umber of memory cells 42 Switch output Floating Time accuracy ± 1 s/day (Quartz) Power reserve 10 years Width 6 modules Type of protection IP 20 Accessories External temperature sensor 1 Art.o.: Details Page 237 External temperature sensor 2 Art.o.: Details Page 237 External temp. sensor IP 65 Art.o.: Details Page 237 Additional accessories Actuator APHA V Details Page 238 Actuator APHA 4 24 V Details Page Connection example RAMSES 366/1 top RAMSES 366/2 top ** ** * * * * Control of circulation pump, electronic actuator, thermal mixer valve or oil/gas burner ** Connection for separate telephone remote switch httpadditional technical data at: Article number 147

148 Clock thermostats Analogue battery version, analogue 230 V CIMATE Analogue clock thermostat - segments RAMSES 784 S Description 8 Common functions Analogue clock thermostat with a low pro- le design for time-dependent monitoring and control of room temperature. Operating point and electronic recirculation are set from the front Party switch and program display Electronic temperature control ormal and reduced temperature can be set separately Selector switch for operating mode: continuous reduced temperature, continuous normal temperature, automatic mode, frost and plant protection +6 C RAMSES 784 S With batteries for 2 or 3 conductor connection Battery monitoring with battery replacement indicator via ashing ED Silting and pump protection function (option) Quartz mechanism Segment program disc with daily program RAMSES 722 S Mains version Segment program disc with daily program Synchronous motor drive RAMSES 782 S Mains version Segment program disc with daily program Quartz mechanism, 3 day power reserve Product selection Power reserve Connection type Program Type of contact Setting range Operating voltage Type Article number 2/3 conductors Daily program Two way switch +10 C +30 C 2 AA batteries R AMSES 784 S /4 conductors Daily program Two way switch +10 C +30 C 230 V AC RAMSES 722 S days 3/4 conductors Daily program Two way switch +10 C +30 C 230 V AC RAMSES 782 S http Additional technical data at: Article number

149 CIMATE Clock thermostats Analogue battery version, analogue 230 V Technical data RAMSES 784 S RAMSES 722 S RAMSES 782 S Operating voltage 2 AA batteries 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Hz Type of contact Two way switch Program Daily program Max. switching capacity 6 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 1 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Switching differential K Switch output Floating Setting range +10 C +30 C Shortest switching time 15 min Programmable every 15 min Time accuracy ± 1 s/day (Quartz) Synchronised with mains ± 1 s/day (Quartz) Power reserve 3 days Display 1 ED-Battery monitoring 1 ED Heating Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Actuator APHA V Art.o.: Details Page 238 Additional accessories Actuator APHA 4 24 V Details Page 238 Adapter RAMSES 72x/78x Details Page 236 Scale drawings RAMSES 784 S, RAMSES 722 S, RAMSES 782 S 29, ,5 Connection example RAMSES 784 S RAMSES 784 S RAMSES 722 S, RAMSES 782 S RAMSES 722 S, RAMSES 782 S httpadditional technical data at: Article number 149

150 Clock thermostat Analogue battery version, analogue 230 V CIMATE Analogue clock thermostat - tappet RAMSES 784 RAMSES 721 Description 8 Common functions Analogue clock thermostat with a low pro- le design for time-dependent monitoring and control of room temperature. Operating point and electronic recirculation are set from the front Party switch and program display Electronic temperature control ormal and reduced temperature can be set separately RAMSES 784 Selector switch for operating mode: continuous reduced temperature, continuous normal temperature, automatic mode, frost and plant protection +6 C With batteries for 2 or 3 conductor connection Battery monitoring with battery replacement indicator via ashing ED Silting and pump protection function (option) Quartz mechanism Tappet program disc with daily or weekly program RAMSES 722 Mains version Selector switch for operating mode: continuous reduced temperature, continuous normal temperature, automatic mode, frost and plant protection +6 C Tappet program disc with daily or weekly program Synchronous motor drive RAMSES 782 Mains version Selector switch for operating mode: continuous reduced temperature, continuous normal temperature, automatic mode, frost and plant protection +6 C Tappet program disc with daily or weekly program Quartz mechanism, 3 day power reserve RAMSES 721 Mains version Reduced temperature approx. 5 K lower in relation to the set comfort temperature Tappet program disc with daily program Synchronous motor drive RAMSES 725 ike RAMSES 722, however: Central control of reduced temperature as per time program Product selection Power reserve Connection type Program Type of contact Setting range Operating voltage Type Article number 2/3 conductors Daily/weekly program Two way switch +10 C +30 C 2 AA batteries RAMSES /4 conductors Daily/weekly program Two way switch +10 C +30 C 230 V AC RAMSES days 3/4 conductors Daily/weekly program Two way switch +10 C +30 C 230 V AC RAMSES /4 conductors Daily program Two way switch +10 C +30 C 230 V AC RAMSES Daily/weekly program Two way switch +10 C +30 C 230 V AC RAMSES http Additional technical data at: Article number

151 CIMATE Clock thermostat Analogue battery version, analogue 230 V Technical data RAMSES 784 RAMSES 722 RAMSES 782 RAMSES 721 RAMSES 725 Operating voltage 2 AA batteries 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Hz 50 Hz Type of contact Two way switch Program Daily/weekly program Daily program Daily/weekly program Max. switching capacity 6 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 1 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Switching differential K K K 1.5 K Switch output Floating Setting range +10 C +30 C Shortest switching time 20 min, 120 min 20 min 20 min, 120 min Programmable every 5 min, 30 min 5 min 5 min, 30 min Time accuracy ± 1 s/day (Quartz) Synchronised with mains ± 1 s/day (Quartz) Synchronised with mains Power reserve 3 days Display 1 ED-Battery monitoring 1 ED Heating Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Actuator APHA V Art.o.: Details Page 238 Additional accessories Actuator APHA 4 24 V Details Page 238 Adapter RAMSES 72x/78x Details Page 236 Scale drawings 90 29, ,5 Connection example RAMSES 784 RAMSES 784 RAMSES 722, RAMSES 782, RAMSES 721, RAMSES 725 RAMSES 722, RAMSES 782, RAMSES 721, RAMSES httpadditional technical data at: Article number 151

152 CIMATE http Additional technical data at: Article number 152

153 w Section overview CIMATE Room thermostats Mechanical Connection type Switching capacity at 230 V AC Type of contact Operating voltage Installation type Type Page 2/3 conductors 10 (4) A C contact V AC Surface-mounted RAMSES RAMSES /4 conductors 10 (4) A C contact V AC Surface-mounted RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES /5 conductors 10 (4) A C contact V AC Surface-mounted RAMSES RAMSES /4 conductors 4/5 conductors Heating: 10 (4) A Cooling: 5 (2) A Heating: 10 (4) A Cooling: 5 (2) A Two way switch V AC Surface-mounted RAMSES Two way switch V AC Surface-mounted RAMSES /3 conductors 10 (4) A C contact V AC Flush-mounted RAMSES /5 conductors 10 (4) A C contact V AC Flush-mounted RAMSES /4 conductors Heating: 10 (4) A Cooling: 5 (1) A Two way switch V AC Flush-mounted RAMSES Electronic 2/3 conductors 10 (4) A C contact V AC Flush-mounted RAMSES 741 RA 156 4/5 conductors 10 (4) A C contact V AC Flush-mounted RAMSES 746 RA 156 3/4 conductors Heating: 10 (4) A Cooling: 5 (1) A Two way switch V AC Flush-mounted RAMSES 748 RA 156 2/3 conductors 8 A C contact 230 V AC Surface-mounted RAMSES /5 conductors 16 A C contact 230 V AC Surface-mounted RAMSES 714 A 158 RAMSES 714 A/FH conductor 16 (4) A O contact 230 V AC Flush-mounted RAMSES 751 RA 158 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 153

154 Room thermostats Mechanical CIMATE Mechanical room thermostat surface-mounted RAMSES 701 RAMSES 706 RAMSES 707 Description 9 Common functions Room temperature controller with thermal feedback Suitable for all types of heating, e. g. gas, water, electric heating with central/individual room control Setting controller with mechanical setting limit or detection RAMSES 701 See general description RAMSES 702 Integrated temperature reduction (approx. 4 K) possible via control with timer RAMSES 703 Internal setting: Temperature cannot be set externally. Temperature is set inside the device at start-up Integrated temperature reduction (approx. 4 K) possible via control with timer RAMSES 704 Switch for additional heating O/OFF + indicator lamp RAMSES 705 Switch for heating O/OFF RAMSES 706 Switch for heating O/OFF + indicator lamp Integrated temperature reduction (approx. 4 K) possible via control with timer RAMSES 707 Switch for heating O/OFF Switch for additional heating O/OFF + indicator lamp RAMSES 708 Also suitable for air conditioning equipment Heating/cooling two-way switch RAMSES 709 Also suitable for air conditioning equipment Heating/cooling two-way switch 3-way selector switch for: comfort mode, reduction mode, external reduction Indicator lamp Integrated temperature reduction (approx. 4 K) possible via control with timer Product selection Connection type Type of contact Switching capacity at 230 V AC Setting range Operating voltage Type Article number 2/3 conductors C contact 10 (4) A +5 C +30 C V AC RAMSES /4 conductors C contact 10 (4) A +5 C +30 C V AC 4/5 conductors C contact 10 (4) A +5 C +30 C V AC 3/4 conductors Two way switch 4/5 conductors Two way switch Heating: 10 (4) A Cooling: 5 (2) A Heating: 10 (4) A Cooling: 5 (2) A RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES C +30 C V AC RAMSES C +30 C V AC RAMSES http Additional technical data at: Article number

155 CIMATE Room thermostats Mechanical Technical data RAMSES 701 RAMSES 702 RAMSES 703 RAMSES 704 RAMSES 705 RAMSES 706 RAMSES 707 RAMSES 708 RAMSES 709 Operating voltage V AC Frequency Hz Type of contact C contact Two way switch Switching capacity 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 4 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6),, Setting range +5 C +30 C Control accuracy approx. 1 K, thermal recirculation Test approvals V Colour Pure white (similar to RA 9010) Installation type Surface-mounted Type of protection IP 30 Protection class II in accordance with E Heating: 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 4 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) Cooling: 5 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 2 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) Accessories Scale drawings Adapter plate RAMSES 70x Art.o.: Details Page ,5 70,7 9 Connection example RAMSES 701 RAMSES 702, RAMSES 703 RAMSES 704 RAMSES RF > TA > RF RF > TA > RF RAMSES 706 RAMSES 707 RAMSES 708 RAMSES TA > RF RF > > RF TA > RF httpadditional technical data at: Article number 155

156 Room thermostats Mechanical CIMATE Mechanical room thermostat RAMSES 741 RAMSES 741 RA RAMSES 746 RA Description 9 Common functions Room temperature controller with thermal feedback Setting controller with mechanical setting limit or detection Central part ts nearly all frames using an adapter frame from the switch manufacturer Ideal controller for refurbished and new build properties RAMSES 741 Supplied as replacement device without frame, central part and setting button, incl. protective cap Frame, central part and setting button available as accessories RAMSES 746 Switch for heating O/OFF + indicator lamp External temperature reduction (approx. 4 K) possible via control with timer Supplied as replacement device without frame, central part and setting button, incl. protective cap Frame, central part and setting button available as accessories RAMSES 748 Heating/cooling two-way switch Supplied as replacement device without frame, central part and setting button, incl. protective cap Frame, central part and setting button available as accessories RAMSES 741 RA With frame, central part and setting button RAMSES 746 RA External temperature reduction (approx. 4 K) possible via control with timer With frame, central part and setting button Switch for heating O/OFF + indicator lamp RAMSES 748 RA Heating/cooling two-way switch With frame, central part and setting button Product selection Scope of delivery Connection type Type of contact Switching capacity at 230 V AC Without cover With cover Setting range Operating voltage Type Article number 2/3 conductors C contact 10 (4) A +5 C +30 C V AC RAMSES /5 conductors C contact 10 (4) A +5 C +30 C V AC RAMSES /4 conductors Two way switch Heating: 10 (4) A Cooling: 5 (1) A +5 C +30 C V AC RAMSES /3 conductors C contact 10 (4) A +5 C +30 C V AC RAMSES 741 RA /5 conductors C contact 10 (4) A +5 C +30 C V AC RAMSES 746 RA /4 conductors Two way switch Heating: 10 (4) A Cooling: 5 (1) A +5 C +30 C V AC RAMSES 748 RA http Additional technical data at: Article number

157 CIMATE Room thermostats Mechanical Technical data RAMSES 741 RAMSES 746 RAMSES 748 RAMSES 741 RA RAMSES 746 RA RAMSES 748 RA Operating voltage V AC Frequency Hz Type of contact C contact Two way switch C contact Two way switch Max. switching capacity 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 4 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) Heating: 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 4 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) Cooling: 5 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 1 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 4 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) Heating: 10 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 4 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) Cooling: 5 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 1 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) Setting range +5 C +30 C Control accuracy approx. 0.5 K, thermal recirculation Test approvals V Colour Pure white shiny (similar to RA 9010) Installation type Flush-mounted Type of protection IP 30 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Scale drawings Additional accessories Central part RAMSES 741/748 Details Page 238 Central part RAMSES 746 Details Page 239 Frame RAMSES 74x Details Page 238 RAMSES 741, RAMSES 746, RAMSES , , , , Connection example RAMSES 741, RAMSES 741 RA RAMSES 746, RAMSES 746 RA RAMSES 748, RAMSES 748 RA > TA > TA > RF RF RF httpadditional technical data at: Article number 157

158 Room thermostats Electronic CIMATE Electronic room thermostats ush-mounted RAMSES 714 RAMSES 714 A RAMSES 751 RA Description 9 RAMSES 714 Electronic room thermostats for all types of heating, e. g. gas, water, electric heating etc. Individual room control possible in combination with Theben actuators Heating status display via ED External temperature reduction (approx. 3.5 K) is possible via control with timer Temperature reduction can be cut to 2 K by opening a wire bridge RAMSES 714 A ike RAMSES 714, however: External temperature sensor for under oor heating (wet rooms or bathroom heating) Switchable for the connection of available TC sensors (33 K /25 C) Switch for heating O/OFF RAMSES 714 A/FH ike RAMSES 714 A, however: Equipped with selectable under oor heating temperature limits 40 C (tiles) or 30 C (laminates, wood, cork) o sensor changeover RAMSES 751 RA Electronic room temperature controller with remote temperature sensor for under- oor temperature control Display of temperature reduction and heating O 2-pole mains switch for heating O/OFF Emergency mode in case of sensor failure with 30 % heating Setting controller with mechanical setting limit or detection External temperature reduction (3 or 5 K) possible via control with timer Central part ts nearly all frames using an adapter frame from the switch manufacturer Product selection Connection type Type of contact Switching capacity at 230 V AC Setting range Installation type Type Article number 2/3 conductors C contact 8 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) +5 C +30 C Surface-mounted RAMSES C +60 C Surface-mounted RAMSES 714 A /5 conductors C contact 16 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) +5 C +40 C Surface-mounted RAMSES 714 A/FH conductor O contact 16 (4) A +10 C +50 C Flush-mounted RAMSES 751 RA http Additional technical data at: Article number

159 CIMATE Room thermostats Electronic Technical data RAMSES 714 RAMSES 714 A RAMSES 714 A/FH RAMSES 751 RA Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Type of contact C contact O contact Max. switching capacity 8 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) 16 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1) 16 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 1), 4 A (at 230 V AC, cos = 0.6) Setting range +5 C +30 C +10 C +60 C +5 C +40 C +10 C +50 C Control accuracy ± 0.25 K ± 0.5 K Control mode Proportional controller with PWM (continuous type) Colour Pure white (similar to RA 9010) Installation type Surface-mounted Flush-mounted Type of protection IP 20 IP 30 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Actuator APHA V Art.o.: Details Page 238 Actuator APHA 4 24 V Art.o.: Details Page 238 Adapter plate RAMSES 714 For RAMSES 714, RAMSES 714 A, RAMSES 714 A/FH Art.o.: , Details Page 236 Scale drawings RAMSES RAMSES 714 A, RAMSES 714 A/FH 32,6 RAMSES 751 RA 80,5 9 23,3 27,9 70, f 50,5 60 Connection example RAMSES 714 RAMSES 714 A, RAMSES 714 A/FH RAMSES 751 RA 8 A 16 A C1 C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 159

160 CIMATE http Additional technical data at: Article number 160

161 Section overview CIMATE Sensor technology Description Type Page Sensor technology CO 2 sensor with USB interface Graphic display of CO 2 levels on PC AMU 716 USB 162 CO 2 sensor for ventilation control and monitoring of air quality in the room with switch and analog outputs AMU 716 R 162 Hygrostat for wall installation for control of humidi ers or ventilation and dehumidi er systems SOTHIS httpadditional technical data at: Article number 161

162 Sensor technology Sensor technology CIMATE CO 2 sensors AMU 716 USB AMU 716 R Description 10 Common functions CO 2 sensor Suitable for conference and meeting rooms, of ces, schools/nurseries, passive and low-energy housing. AMU 716 USB Simple installation and start-up on PC via USB interface Software for Windows 98 SE/ME/2000/XP Acoustic and visual warning signals on reaching the threshold value Product selection og le of CO 2 level can be saved Saves automatically during extended recordings Graphic display of CO 2 levels on PC Representation of course of last 80 minutes using diagrams Additional display of current CO 2 level on directly sensor via 5 EDs Adjustable acoustic alarm threshold AMU 716 R For fan control Warning display for CO 2 concentration (lights) Power unit optionally available. Power unit is suitable for ush mounted installation Simple upgrade of uncontrolled ventilation systems possible 2 switch outputs CO 2 controlled for 2 stage control, with manual and automatic mode as well as display of switching status 3 x 0 10 V outputs for CO 2, temperature and relative humidity Measuring range Data interface Display Protection class Type Article number ppm *Available May 2010 USB 5 EDs III in accordance with E AMU 716 USB x 0 10 V, 2 x Relay 6 EDs II in accordance with E AMU 716 R * http Additional technical data at: Article number

163 CIMATE Sensor technology Sensor technology Technical data AMU 716 USB AMU 716 R Operating voltage 5 V DC via USB bus voltage 24 V DC SEV Outputs USB 3 x 0 10 V, 2 x Relay Max. switching capacity 5 A Measuring range CO ppm Measuring range temperature +5 C +40 C Measuring range humidity % rh Hysteresis ± 75 ppm, in relation to set value Switched threshold 700 ppm ±200 ppm, 1300 ppm ±200 ppm Connection type USB, cable length 1.5 m Display 5 EDs 6 EDs Installation type Wall installation (also on ush-mounted housing) Type of protection IP 20 Protection class III in accordance with E 60,730-1 II in accordance with E Accessories Scale drawings Power unit CO 2 sensor Details Page 236 AMU 716 USB 80 30,8 AMU 716 R httpadditional technical data at: Article number 163

164 Sensor technology Sensor technology CIMATE SOTHIS 715 Description Hygrostat for wall installation Measurement of relative humidity. Suitable for control of humidi ers or ventilation and dehumidi er systems Use SEV where there is a risk of high humidity and the build up of condensation Product selection Measuring range Type of contact Switching capacity Humidi er Switching capacity Dehumidifying Type Article number % rf Two way switch 2 A 5 A SOTHIS Technical data SOTHIS 715 Operating voltage Frequency Max. switching capacity Dehumidifying Max. switching capacity Humidi er 230 V AC Hz 5 A 2 A Colour Pure white (similar to RA 9010) Installation type Wall installation Type of protection IP 30 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories: Adapter plate RAMSES 714 Art.o.: Details Page 236 Scale drawings ,3 Connection example http Additional technical data at: Article number

165 CIMATE Sensor technology Sensor technology 10 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 165

166 SYSTEMS http Additional technical data at: Article number

167 Section overview SYSTEMS KX Actuators Dimming actuators Designation Type page Actuators C load 4-12 channels MIX 2 RMG 4 I KX/RME 4 I KX 168 Actuators 8-24 channels MIX 2 RMG 8 S KX/RME 8 S KX 169 Actuators C load 4-12 channels MIX 1 RMG 4 C-oad KX/RME 4 C-oad KX 170 Actuators 4-12 channels MIX 1 RMG 4 S KX/RME 4 S KX 171 Switch or blind actuators 4-16 channels RMG 8 KX/RME 8 KX 172 Control units 2-6 channels MIX 1 SMG 2 S KX/SME 2 S KX 173 Universal dimming actuators 2-6 channels MIX 1 DMG 2 S KX/ DME 2 S KX/DMB 2 S KX 174 Blind actuators Blind actuators 4-12 channels MIX 1 JMG 4 S KX/JME 4 S KX 176 Blind actuators 4-12 channels JMG 4 24V DC KX/JME 4 24V DC KX 177 Binary inputs Binary inputs 6-18 channels MIX 1 BMG 6 KX/BME 6 KX 178 Binary inputs for ush-mounted sockets TA 2 KX/TA 4 KX/TA 6 KX 179 Heating and air conditioning control multifunction display VARIA 826 KX/824 KX 180 Room thermostat and individual room thermostat RAMSES 770 KX/713 S KX/712 KX 181 Heating actuators HMG 4 KX/HME 4 KX/HMT 6 KX/HMT 12 KX 184 Motor-driven actuators CHEOPS control KX/ CHEOPS drive KX 186 CO 2 Room air sensor AMU 716 KX 187 Individual room thermostat Fan-Coil and Fan-Coil actuator RAMSES 713 FC KX/FCA 1 KX 188 Presence and motion detectors Motion detector SPHIX 331 KX/332 KX/ KX 190 Weather station, brightness sensors Time switches System devices Display units Passive infrared presence detector compact of ce EIB/compact passage KX/compact passimo KX/ECO-IR 180EIB-AC ECO-IR 360EIB-AC/ECO-IR DUA-EIB KX weather stations KX weather station/kx weather station basic 200 Brightness sensors and temperature sensors UA 130 KX/131 KX/133 KX channel time switches with annual program TR 644 S DCF KX/TR 644 S KX channel time switch with weekly program TR 612 S KX 206 Time signal transmitter ZS 600 DF KX 207 Supply voltage Power supply 640 ma/320 ma/160 ma 208 Interface and line coupler USB interface KX/ line coupler KX KX indoor clock OSIRIA 210 httpadditional technical data at: Article number

168 Switch actuators KX SYSTEMS Actuators C load 4 12 channels MIX 2 RMG 4 I KX RME 4 I KX Description Common functions 4-way C load switching actuator MIX 2 With current recognition For higher lamp loads Up to two extension modules MIX 1 or MIX 2 can be connected to one basic module Device and KX bus module can be swapped independently of each other Removable KX bus module enables devices to be changed without reprogramming Product selection Manual set-up and use of switching actuators is possible without KX bus module ED switching status display for each channel Manual operation on device (even without bus connection) Switching functions: E.g. On/Off, pulse, On/ Off delay, staircase light with warning ogical links: e.g. lock, AD, release, OR Technical data RMG 4 I KX Basic module MIX 2 Can be upgraded to maximum of 12 channels RME 4 I KX Extension module MIX 2 For upgrading to maximum of 12 channels 11 Type Article number RMG 4 I KX * RME 4 I KX * *Available June 2010 Connection example RMG 4 I KX RMG 4 I KX RME 4 I KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Operating voltage V AC, 0 65 Hz Power consumption 3 VA 2.5 VA Width 4 modules Type of contact O contact, 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E RME 4 I KX C1 C2 C1 C C3 C4 KX C3 C4 http Additional technical data at: Article number

169 SYSTEMS Switch actuators KX Actuators 8 24 channels MIX 2 RMG 8 S KX RME 8 S KX Description Common functions 8-way switching actuator MIX 2 Up to two extension modules MIX 1 or MIX 2 can be connected to one basic module Device and KX bus module can be swapped independently of each other Removable KX bus module enables devices to be changed without reprogramming Manual set-up and use of switching actuators is possible without KX bus module ED switching status display for each channel Manual operation on device (even without bus connection) Switching functions: E.g On/Off, pulse, On/ Off delay, staircase light with warning ogical links: e.g. lock, AD, release, OR RMG 8 S KX Basic module MIX 2 Can be upgraded to maximum of 24 channels RME 8 S KX Extension module MIX 2 For upgrading to maximum of 24 channels Product selection Technical data Type Article number RMG 8 S KX * RME 8 S KX * *Available June 2010 Connection example RMG 8 S KX RMG 8 S KX RME 8 S KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Operating voltage V AC, 0 65 Hz Power consumption 3.6 VA 3 VA Width 4 modules Type of contact O contact, 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 3 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E RME 8 S KX C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C C5 C6 C7 C8 KX C5 C6 C7 C8 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 169

170 Switch actuators KX SYSTEMS Actuators C load 4 12 channels MIX 1 RMG 4 C-oad KX RME 4 C-oad KX Description Common functions 4-way C load switching actuator MIX 1 For higher lamp loads Up to 2 extension modules can be connected to a basic module. Can be combined with all MIX 1 series devices Free combination of switches, dimming, blinds and heating control as well as binary inputs Product selection ED switching status display for each channel Manual switch with On/Off/Bus settings (also without bus voltage) Switching functions: e.g. On/Off, pulse, On/ Off delay, staircase light with warning ogical links: e.g. lock,ad, release, OR Technical data RMG 4 C-oad KX Basic module MIX 1 Can be upgraded to maximum of 12 channels RME 4 C-oad KX Extension module MIX 1 For upgrading to maximum of 12 channels 11 Type Article number RMG 4 C-oad KX RME 4 C-oad KX RMG 4 C-oad KX RME 4 C-oad KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Operating voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz Power consumption 2.5 VA Width 4 modules Type of contact O contact, 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Connection example RMG 4 C-oad KX RME 4 C-oad KX C1 C2 C3 C C1 C2 C3 C4 KX http Additional technical data at: Article number

171 SYSTEMS Switch actuators KX Actuators 4 12 channels MIX 1 RMG 4 S KX RME 4 S KX Description Common functions 4-way switching actuator MIX 1 Up to 2 extension modules can be connected to a basic module. Can be combined with all MIX 1 series devices Free combination of switches, dimming, blinds and heating control as well as binary inputs Product selection ED switching status display for each channel Manual switch with On/Off/Bus settings (also without bus voltage) Switching functions: e.g. On/Off, pulse, On/ Off delay, staircase light with warning ogical links: e.g. lock,ad, release, OR Technical data RMG 4 S KX Basic module MIX 1 Can be upgraded to maximum of 12 channels RME 4 S KX Extension module MIX 1 For upgrading to maximum of 12 channels Type Article number RMG 4 S KX RME 4 S KX RMG 4 S KX RME 4 S KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Operating voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz Power consumption 2.5 VA Width 4 modules Type of contact O contact, 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 10 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Connection example RMG 4 S KX RME 4 S KX C1 C2 C3 C C1 C2 C3 C4 KX httpadditional technical data at: Article number 171

172 Switch actuators KX SYSTEMS Switch or blind actuators 4 16 channels RMG 8 KX RME 8 KX Description Common functions 4-way blind or 8-way switching actuator Flexible channel function selection: As switching actuator or for controlling drives for blinds, shutters, sun and vision protection devices, skylights and ventilation aps Manual operation on device ED switching status display on device Manual switch for Up/Down or for Switching On/Off (also without bus voltage) Optimised repetition accuracy of programmed lamella positions Slip correction when moving from bottom to top RMG 8 KX Basic module Upgradeable to 8 blind or 16 switching outputs RME 8 KX Extension module Upgradeable to 8 blind or 16 switching outputs Product selection Technical data 11 Type Article number RMG 8 KX RME 8 KX RMG 8 KX RME 8 KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 8 ma) Operating voltage V AC, 50 Hz Power consumption 4 VA Width 6 modules Type of contact O contacts, 10 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 6 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Connection example RMG 8 KX RME 8 KX C1.1 C1.2 C2.1 C2.2 C1.1 C1.2 C2.1 C2.2 C C C4.1 C KX C C C4.1 C http Additional technical data at: Article number

173 SYSTEMS Dimming actuators KX Control units 2 6 channels MIX 1 SMG 2 S KX SME 2 S KX Description Common functions 2-way 1 10 V control unit MIX 1 Switching and dimming of lighting circuits in combination with electronic ballasts (EBs) Up to 2 extension modules can be connected to a basic module. Can be combined with all MIX 1 series devices Product selection Free combination of switches, dimming, blinds and heating control as well as binary inputs 1 10V control inputs and one switch output (relay contact) per channel ED switching status display for each channel Manual switch with On/Off/Bus settings (also without bus voltage) Technical data With zero-cross switching for switching without relays SMG 2 S KX Basic module MIX 1 Can be upgraded to maximum of 6 channels SME 2 S KX Extension module MIX 1 For upgrading to maximum of 6 channels Type Article number SMG 2 S KX SME 2 S KX SMG 2 S KX SME 2 S KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Operating voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz Power consumption 2 VA Width 4 modules Type of contact O contacts, 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 10 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Connection example SMG 2 S KX EVG C C1 C2 C2 + 1 EVG KX httpadditional technical data at: Article number 173

174 Dimming actuators KX SYSTEMS Universal dimming actuators 2 6 channels MIX 1 DMG 2 S KX DME 2 S KX DMB 2 S KX Description Common functions 2-way universal dimmer actuator MIX 1 For dimming incandescent lamps, V and HV halogen lamps Also suitable for switching of dimmable energy-saving lamps Also suitable for controlling fans Up to 2 extension modules can be connected to a basic module. Can be combined with all MIX 1 series devices Free combination of switches, dimming, blinds and heating control as well as binary inputs Product selection Dimming output: 2 x 300 W/VA or 1 x 500 W/VA If the DMB 2 'dim booster' is used, the dimming output per device can be doubled to: 2 x 600 W/VA or 1 x 1,000 W/VA ED switching status display for each channel Manual switch with On/Off/Bus settings (also without bus voltage) Automatic load detection (can be deactivated) DMG 2 S KX Basic module MIX 1 Can be upgraded to maximum of 6 channels DME 2 S KX Extension module MIX 1 For upgrading to maximum of 6 channels DMB 2 S KX 2 channel dimming output upgrade 'Dimmbooster' To double the output of basic and extension modules. e.g. to: 2 x 600 W/VA (1 channel) or 1 x 1,000 W/ VA (2 channels) ED switching status display for each channel 11 Type Article number DMG 2 S KX DME 2 S KX DMB 2 S KX Technical data DMG 2 S KX DME 2 S KX DMB 2 S KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Operating voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz Power consumption 1 VA 0.5 VA Width 4 modules amp types Incandescent lamps, low-voltage and high-voltage halogen lights, dimmable Compact energy saving lamps Incandescent lamps, low-voltage and high-voltage halogen lights http Additional technical data at: Article number

175 SYSTEMS Dimming actuators KX DMG 2 S KX DME 2 S KX DMB 2 S KX Min. switching capacity 10 W/VA 300 W Max symmetrical switching capacity 2 x 300 W/VA Upgrade to 2 x 300 W/VA Max asymmetrical switching capacity 1 x 500 W/VA Upgrade to 1 x 500 W/VA Switching capacity energy saving lamps max. 2 x 60 W or 1 x 100 W Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Connection example DMG 2 S KX DME 2 S KX 1 2 C1 3 4 C2 1 2 C1 3 4 C2 KX 500 W 500 W DMG 2 S KX DME 2 S KX 1 2 C1 3 4 C2 1 2 C1 3 4 C2 KX 300 W 300 W 300 W 300 W 11 DMB 2 S KX C1 C2 C1 C2 DMG 2 KX DMB 2 KX KX 600 W 600 W httpadditional technical data at: Article number 175

176 Blind actuators KX SYSTEMS Blind actuators 4 12 channels MIX 1 JMG 4 S KX JME 4 S KX Description Common functions 4-way blind actuator MIX 1 For controlling drives for blinds, shutters, sun and vision protection devices, skylights and ventilation aps Up to 2 extension modules can be connected to a basic module. Can be combined with all MIX 1 series devices Free combination of switches, dimming, blinds and heating control as well as binary inputs Manual operation on device (even without bus connection) ED Up and Down switching status display for each channel Floating contacts for Up and Down per channel Copy function for fast con guration JMG 4 S KX Basic module MIX 1 Can be upgraded to maximum of 12 channels JME 4 S KX Extension module MIX 1 For upgrading to maximum of 12 channels Product selection Technical data Type Article number JMG 4 S KX JME 4 S KX JMG 4 S KX JME 4 S KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 8 ma) Operating voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz Power consumption 2.5 VA Width 4 modules 11 Type of contact O contact, 3 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1) Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Connection example JMG 4 S KX JME 4 S KX M M M M C1 C2 C1 C2 KX C3 C4 C3 C4 M M 1 2 http Additional technical data at: Article number M M

177 SYSTEMS Blind actuators KX Blind actuators 4 12 channels JMG 4 24V DC KX JME 4 24V DC KX Description Common functions 4-way DC blind actuator For controlling 24 V and 12 Vdrives in internal blinds and sun blinds Manual operation on device ED switching status display on device Manual switch for Up / Down or for Switching On / Off (also without bus voltage) Optimised repetition accuracy of programmed lamella positions Slip correction when moving from bottom to top Response on bus/mains failure con gurable 3 security objects (ED display) JMG 4 24V DC KX Basic module Can be upgraded to maximum of 8 channels JME 4 24V DC KX Extension module For upgrading to maximum of 8 channels Product selection Technical data Type Article number JMG 4 24V DC KX JME 4 24V DC KX JMG 4 24V DC KX JME 4 24V DC KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 8 ma) Operating voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz Power consumption 4 VA Width 6 modules Type of contact O contacts, 5 A (at 24 V DC), 5 A (at 12 V DC) Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Connection example JMG 4 24V DC KX JME 4 24V DC KX C1.1 C1.2 C2.1 C2.2 C1.1 C1.2 C2.1 C2.2 C C C4.1 C KX C C C4.1 C httpadditional technical data at: Article number 177

178 Binary inputs KX SYSTEMS Binary inputs 6 18 channels MIX 1 BMG 6 KX BME 6 KX Description Common functions 6-way binary input MIX 1 Multi-voltage input AC/DC or auxiliary supply from device (approx. 18V AC / 20mA) Floating inputs Up to 2 extension modules can be connected to a basic module. Can be combined with all MIX 1 series devices Free combination of switches, dimming, blinds and heating control as well as binary inputs All inputs can be operated with different voltages Free allocation of functions: Switch/key, dimming, blinds, valuator, counter ED switching status display for each input BMG 6 KX Basic module MIX 1 Can be upgraded to maximum of 18 channels BME 6 KX Extension module MIX 1 For upgrading to maximum of 18 channels Product selection Technical data 11 Type Article number BMG 6 KX BME 6 KX Connection example BMG 6 KX BMG 6 KX BME 6 KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Operating voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz Power consumption 2.5 VA Width 4 modules Voltage/power consumption inputs V AC/DC 3 ma Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E BME 6 KX 8 V AC/DC 8 V AC/DC I1 I2 I I1 I2 I KX I4 I5 I I4 I5 I http Additional technical data at: Article number

179 SYSTEMS Binary inputs KX Binary inputs for ush-mounted sockets TA 2 KX TA 4 KX TA 6 KX Description Common functions Binary input/binary output sensor interfaces Can be installed in ush-mounted sockets with conventional sensors/switches Free allocation of functions: Switch/key, dimming, blinds, valuator Inputs can be recon gured to outputs: binary input: oating contact binary output: 1 ma (low current) (ED 1 ma types) Grooves on side of housing for switch/ sensor clamps TA 2 KX 2-way key interface 4-pole cable connection TA 4 KX 4-way key interface 8-pole cable connection TA 6 KX 6-way key interface 8-pole cable connection Product selection Technical data Type Article number TA 2 KX TA 4 KX TA 6 KX TA 2 KX TA 4 KX TA 6 KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Output con guration ED ow current 1 ma (ED 1 ma types) without series resistor Contact voltage 3.3 V Contact current 0.5 ma Interface extension max. 5 m Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Connection example TA 2 KX TA 4 KX TA 6 KX C1 C2 C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 KX KX KX httpadditional technical data at: Article number 179

180 Heating and air conditioning control KX SYSTEMS Multifunction display VARIA 826 KX VARIA 826 KX VARIA 824 KX Description Common functions Multi-functional display with room thermostat Freely con gurable for displaying and controlling functions e.g. light settings, sun protection systems Illuminated display and integrated timer For control and regulation of heating, fan coils, air conditioning systems Up to 7 different display pages Can also be operated without 230 V connection (double power consumption from bus system) Product selection Automatic summer/winter time adjustment with power reserve Controls up to 8 rooms via own temperature pro les Weekly time switch with 8 channels with up to 3 different statuses, e.g. for light, shutters, fans etc. 3 heating programs Alternative continuous or on/off control Operation modes: comfort, standby, temperature reduction at night, frost protection Technical data Weather information from the Theben weather station can be displayed Free choice of programming via the ETS without plug-in Installation in ush-mounted socket VARIA 826 Glass front in white or black VARIA 824 White plastic housing 11 Colour Type Article number Glass front in white VARIA 826 KX Glass front in black VARIA 826 KX White plastic housing VARIA 824 KX Operating voltage KX Operating voltage Power consumption Power reserve Display VARIA KX Bus voltage, (< 8 ma) 230 V AC, 50 Hz 2.5 VA 1.5 years display with 132 x 72 points (8 lines with various functions) e.g. title, switching, dimming, blinds/shutters, % value, HVAC, counter value, temperature, 2-byte value, 8/16 bit counter value etc. Ambient temperature +0 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Scale drawings VARIA 826 KX VARIA 824 KX 45,6 18, ,4 80 http Additional technical data at: Article number

181 SYSTEMS Heating and air conditioning control KX RAMSES 770 KX Description Room thermostat For control and regulation of heating, fan coils, air conditioning systems Illuminated display Settings with text guidance Automatic summer/winter time changeover 3 heating programs Alternative continuous or on/off control Operation modes: comfort, standby, temperature reduction at night, frost protection Free choice of programming via the ETS without plug-in Installation in ush-mounted socket External time signal is necessary for synchronisation Product selection Type Article number RAMSES 770 KX Technical data RAMSES 770 KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Ambient temperature +0 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Scale drawings 82,8 36,3 12,4 80,8 11 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 181

182 Heating and air conditioning control KX SYSTEMS RAMSES 713 S KX Description Individual room thermostat For controlling heating actuators or motorised actuators Can be used as a continuous or two point control (can also be combined). Continuous PI control can be con gured for 2 stage heating (basic and additional stage, e. g. under oor heating and radiators) or for heating and cooling (radiators and cooling surfaces) Two rotary controls are included in the scope of supply: a numerical scale (mounted) and 1 relative scale (enclosed) Rotary control can be limited mechanically or via parameters. Manual overide button for presence or operation modes: comfort, standby, temperature reduction at night, frost protection 3 binary inputs for conventional switches/ sensors (switching, dimming, blinds), also for external temperature sensor, window contact or presence signal Temperature sensor can be connected to give remote temperature reading ED (red) for heating mode, (blue) for cooling mode With integrated bus coupling unit Product selection Type Article number RAMSES 713 S KX Technical data RAMSES 713 S KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage (< 10 ma) Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Measuring range temperature +0 C +40 C Adjustable temperature +10 C +28 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Scale drawings 11 External temperature sensor 1 Art.o.: Details Page 237 Temperature sensor Art.o.: Details Page http Additional technical data at: Article number

183 SYSTEMS Heating and air conditioning control KX RAMSES 712 KX Product selection Description Individual room thermostat For controlling heating actuators or motorised actuators Can be used as a continuous or two point control (can also be combined). Temperature sensor can be connected give remote temperature reading Objects for night operation (only with "old" operation mode selection) presence, window/frost ED (red) for heating mode Inputs can be recon gured to outputs for connecting ED (ED 1 ma types) 2 binary inputs for conventional switches/ sensors (switch/sensor, dimmer, blinds, valuator, ED control) Can be installed in ush-mounted sockets (temperature sensor with electronic component can be removed from housing and installed in ush-mounted sockets with back-ventilated cover) With integrated bus coupling unit Type Article number RAMSES 712 KX Technical data RAMSES 712 KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage (< 10 ma) Output con guration ED ow current 1 ma (ED 1 ma types) Interface extension max. 5 m Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Measuring range temperature 20 C +60 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Temperature sensor Art.o.: Details Page 237 Adapter plate RAMSES 70x Art.o.: Details Page Scale drawings 74 23, httpadditional technical data at: Article number 183

184 Heating and air conditioning control KX SYSTEMS Heating actuators 4 12 channels MIX 1 HMG 4 KX HME 4 KX Description Common functions 4-way heating actuator MIX 1 For controlling thermal actuators Silent semiconductor switch (triac) Up to 2 extension modules can be connected to a basic module. Can be combined with all MIX 1 series devices Free combination of switches, dimming, blinds and heating control as well as binary inputs Maximum control variables for integrating boiler control For integrating boiler control It is possible to control a circulation pump directly via the actuator. Up to 5 positioning actuators per channel Floating outputs V AC Manual switch with On/Off/Bus settings (also without bus voltage) Switching status display for each channel With summer mode and valve protection Continuous or switching actuating value selectable HMG 4 KX Basic module MIX 1 Can be upgraded to maximum of 12 channels HME 4 KX Extension module MIX 1 For upgrading to maximum of 12 channels Product selection Technical data 11 Type Article number HMG 4 KX HME 4 KX HMG 4 KX HME 4 KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Operating voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz Power consumption 2.5 VA Width 4 modules Type of contact Triac, 0.5 A Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Actuator APHA V Details Page 238 Actuator APHA 4 24 V Details Page 238 Connection example HMG 4 KX H1 H2 H3 H4 HME 4 KX H1 H2 H3 H4 KX http Additional technical data at: Article number

185 SYSTEMS Heating and air conditioning control KX Heating actuators with triacs HMT 6 KX HMT 12 KX Description Common functions Heating actuator for controlling thermal actuators (24 V) Can be installed directly on a wall or a rail in the heating circuit distributor Mains plug on transformer for easy installation Screwless terminal technology Integrated power supply for a maximum of 13 thermal actuators Silent semiconductor switch (triac) For integrating boiler control Summer mode and valve protection Continuous or switching actuating value selectable HMT 6 KX 6-way heating actuator HMT 12 KX 12-way heating actuator Product selection Technical data Type Article number HMT 6 KX HMT 12 KX HMT 6 KX HMT 12 KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage 10 ma Operating voltage 230 V AC, Hz umber of channels 6 12 Type of contact Triac Fuse T 2 A Ambient temperature 5 C +50 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Actuator APHA 4 24 V Details Page Connection example HMT 6 KX KX httpadditional technical data at: Article number 185

186 Heating and air conditioning control KX SYSTEMS Motor-driven modulating actuators CHEOPS control KX CHEOPS drive KX Description Common functions Motorised actuator for heater valve or for controlling the heating valves Display of valve stroke Automatic valve stroke recognition 2 inputs for window contact, presence detector, remote sensor Simple installation by clicking onto valve adapter Can be used in heating circuit distributor Integrated bus coupling unit With summer mode and valve protection 2 different valve adapters included CHEOPS control KX Independent room thermostat and integrated temperature sensor Manual operation possible via 2 keys on the device Display via EDs (red/blue for hotter/colder) Con gurable as: Heating control (continuous control),two stage heating, heating and cooling CHEOPS drive KX Without integrated control Display via EDs (red) Product selection Technical data 11 Type Article number CHEOPS control KX CHEOPS drive KX CHEOPS control KX CHEOPS drive KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Maximum valve stroke 7.5 mm Controlling torque value 120 Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection class III according to E Protection rating IP 20 IP 21 Accessories External temperature sensor 1 Art.o.: Details Page 237 Valve adapter VA 78 Art.o.: Details Page 238 Valve adapter VA 80 Art.o.: Details Page 238 http Additional technical data at: Article number

187 SYSTEMS Heating and air conditioning control KX AMU 716 KX Description CO 2 air quality sensor Measures CO 2 level, relative humidity and temperature Three independent, con gurable thresholds for the CO 2 level and relative humidity A threshold for the temperature Actions can be carried out if thresholds are exceeded or not reached (send, priority, switching, value) Display of achieved threshold of CO ² level and relative humidity through multi-coloured EDs CO 2 Setting range of ppm (threshold) Relative humidity of 1% to 100% "Physical value" object of ppm Power supply via KX bus voltage, 230 V mains supply not required Product selection Type Article number AMU 716 KX Technical data AMU 716 KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Measuring range CO ppm Measuring range temperature +0 C +40 C Measuring range humidity % rh Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Adapter plate RAMSES 70x Art.o.: Details Page Scale drawings 74 23, httpadditional technical data at: Article number 187

188 Heating and air conditioning control KX SYSTEMS RAMSES 713 FC KX Description Individual room thermostat fan coil For control of fan coil Continuous PI controller for heating and cooling Two rotary controls are included in the scope of supply: an absolute scale (mounted) and 1 relative scale (enclosed) Rotary control can be limited mechanically or via parameters. Manual button for OFF, Auto, fan stages 1, 2, 3 operation modes 3 binary inputs for conventional switches/ sensors (switching, dimming, blinds), also for external temperature sensor, window contact or presence signal ED (red) for heating mode, (blue) for cooling mode With integrated bus coupling unit Product selection Type Article number RAMSES 713 FC KX Technical data RAMSES 713 FC KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage (< 10 ma) Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Measuring range temperature +0 C +40 C Adjustable temperature +10 C +28 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories External temperature sensor 1 Art.o.: Details Page 237 Scale drawings http Additional technical data at: Article number

189 SYSTEMS Heating and air conditioning control KX FCA 1 KX Description Fan coil actuator For controlling fan coils For 2 and 4 pipe systems For up to three fan stages For 2-way and 3-way valves Additional relay for electrical heater or cooler bank Floating input for a window contact or temperature sensor Floating input, condensation monitoring Display of operation status via 9 EDs Manual operation on device (fan stages, switching between heating and cooling) Adjustment of setpoint value for cooling in relation to external temperature Floating switching contact for either cooler or heater bank With emergency program Product selection Type Article number FCA 1 KX Technical data Operating voltage KX Operating voltage Power consumption Width Type of contact Switching capacity valves (triacs) Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) 230 V AC, Hz 3 VA 4 modules Triac 0.5 A ( V AC) FCA 1 KX Switching capacity, additional relay 16 A Switching capacity, ventilator relay 8 A Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories: External temperature sensor 1 Art.o.: Details Page 237 Connection example S1 S2 S3 S 11 E1 E2 C- C+ C H H+ H- M M +C C1 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 189

190 Motion detectors KX SYSTEMS Motion detectors SPHIX 331, KX, SPHIX 332 KX Description Passive infrared motion detector For controlling lighting, ventilation etc., particularly in of ces and hallways Integrated bus coupling With constant light control ighting control "movement-dependent only " and "movement and brightness dependent" Continuous constant light control/movement-dependent the following functions: e.g. lighting O/ OFF, shutters/blinds UP/DOW, time functions (switch-off delay), locking the motion detector, call up setting, dimming values, dimming UP/DOW, Master/Slave function Flush tting design (projects 5 mm from ceiling) SPHIX 331 KX 1 channel motion detector SPHIX 332 KX 2 channel motion detector Additional programming keys can activate the phys. address via a programming magnet (if programming is executed after installation) Product selection Type Article number SPHIX 331 KX SPHIX 332 KX Technical data 11 SPHIX 331 KX SPHIX 332 KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Detection range Ø 7 m at installation height of 2.8 m Brightness measuring range lx (with correction factor to 5600 lx) ight switch-off delay 1 s 120 min Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Scale drawings Detection range 68, ,6 Ø m 7 m Ø 76 Ø 36,9 Ø 58,4 Ø 64/68 Area of high sensitivity 7 m Area of low sensitivity http Additional technical data at: Installation height 2.8 m Article number

191 SYSTEMS Motion detectors KX SPHIX KX Description SPHIX KX 2 channel passive infrared motion detector For controlling lighting in outdoor areas Blended light measurement suitable for the control of uorescent, incandescent and halogen lamps Adjustable sensor head Additional creep under protection. via remote control Detection range can be limited using enclosed segments Settings per ETS: Brightness range and switch-off delay Set point adjustment of brightness either via object or potentiometer the following functions: ighting O/OFF, time functions, locking the motion detector ighting control with adjustable light threshold value and adjustable switch-off delay Memorising of current brightness value possible via remote control Setting controls protected against manipulation Single-handed plug-in installation with captive screws Product selection Type Article number SPHIX KX * *Available May 2010 Technical data SPHIX KX Operating voltage KX Detection range Brightness measuring range Bus voltage, < 10 ma Ø 5 30 m at installation height of 2.5 m lx ight switch-off delay 1 s 120 min Ambient temperature 20 C +50 C Protection rating IP 55 Accessories Scale drawings SPHIX RC 105 Details Page 235 SPHIX RC 105 Pro Details Page 235 SPHIX corner angle Details Page Detection area see page 109 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 191

192 Presence detector KX SYSTEMS compact of ce EIB Description Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) For controlling lighting, ventilation etc., particularly in of ces and hallways Square detection area Mixed light measurement The square detection area allows accurate and simple planning Two outputs light for controlling two lighting groups Switching or constant light control Choice of fully or semi automatic operation Presence output for HVAC control with switch on delay and switch-off delay Room monitoring Integrated bus coupling QuickSet plus service remote control (optional) Clic user remote control (optional) In the "Switching" operation mode, the lighting switches on with darkness and presence and off with suf cient light or absence. In the "constant light control" operation mode the sensor controls the arti cial light daylight-dependent on a constant lighting level The self-learning switch-off delay adjusts to occupants' behaviour Fully or semi-automatic: In "Fully automatic" mode, the lighting switches on and off automatically according to presence and light. In "Semi automatic" mode, it must be switched on manually and switches off automatically The monitoring output works with reduced sensitivity and indicates the presence of persons with a high level of accuracy The brightness output makes the light information available for visualisation purposes Master or slave operating mode is selected via con guration. Test operation mode checks the detection range and con guration Product selection Colour Type Article number Pure white (similar to RA 9010) compact of ce EIB Black (similar to RA 9005) compact of ce EIB BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) compact of ce EIB SR additional colours available upon request 11 Technical data compact of ce EIB Operating voltage KX Bus voltage Recommended installation height 2 3 m Brightness measuring range lx ight switch-off delay 30 s 20 min ight stand-by time 0 s 60 min Presence switch-off delay 30 s 120 min Presence switch on delay 0 s 30 min Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 http Additional technical data at: Article number

193 SYSTEMS Presence detector KX Detection area (square) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) 2 m 9 m² 3.0 m x 3.0 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m ± 0.5 m A 0.8 ux 2.5 m 16 m² 4.0 m x 4.0 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m ± 0.5 m B C 3 m 25 m² 5.0 m x 5.0 m 49 m² 7.0 m x 7.0 m ± 1.0 m 3.5 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m ± 1.0 m Accessories QuickSet plus Art.o.: Details Page 234 clic Details Page 233 Surface frame compact Art.o.: Details Page 232 QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 Scale drawings 102, ,5 102, , httpadditional technical data at: Article number 193

194 Presence detector KX SYSTEMS Presence detectors compact passage KX, compact passimo KX compact passage KX compact passimo KX Description Common functions Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) For controlling lighting, ventilation etc., particularly in corridors and hallways Mixed light measurement The square detection range allows accurate and simple planning Two outputs light for controlling two lighting groups Switching or constant light control Choice of fully or semi automatic operation Presence output for HVAC control with switch on delay and switch-off delay Room monitoring Integrated bus coupling QuickSet plus service remote control (optional) Clic user remote control (optional) In the "Switching" operation mode, the lighting switches on with darkness and presence and off with suf cient light or absence. In the "constant light control" operation mode the sensor controls the arti cial light daylight-dependent on a constant lighting level The self-learning switch-off delay adjusts to occupants' behaviour Fully or semi-automatic: In "Fully automatic" mode, the lighting switches on and off automatically according to presence and light. In "Semi automatic" mode, it must be switched on manually and switches off automatically The monitoring output works with reduced sensitivity and indicates the presence of persons with a high level of accuracy The brightness output makes the light information available for visualisation purposes Master or slave operating mode is selected via con guration. Test operation mode checks the detection range and con guration compact passage KX Rectangular detection area for corridors compact passimo KX Rectangular detection area for storage areas with clear demarcation vertically below the presence detector Product selection 11 *Available May 2010 Colour Type Article number Pure white (similar to RA 9010) compact passage KX Black (similar to RA 9005) compact passage KX BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) compact passage KX SR Pure white (similar to RA 9010) compact passimo KX * Black (similar to RA 9005) compact passimo KX BK * Silver (similar to RA 9006) compact passimo KX SR * additional colours available upon request http Additional technical data at: Article number

195 SYSTEMS Presence detector KX Technical data compact passage KX, compact passimo KX Operating voltage KX Recommended installation height Brightness measuring range ight switch-off delay ight stand-by time Bus voltage 2 3 m lx 30 s 20 min 0 s 60 min Presence switch-off delay 30 s 120 min Presence switch on delay 0 s-30 min Ambient temperature +0 C +50 C Protection rating IP 40 Detection area compact passage KX (rectangular) Installation height (A) Head on to (r) Diagonally (t) A ux 2 m 56 m² 16 m x 3.5 m ± 1 m 105 m² 30 m x 3.5 m ± 1 m 2.5 m 72 m² 18 m x 4.0 m ± 1 m 120 m² 30 m x 4.0 m ± 1 m r t 3 m 90 m² 20 m x 4.5 m ± 1 m 135 m² 30 m x 4.5 m ± 1 m 3.5 m 100 m² 20 m x 5.0 m ± 1 m 150 m² 30 m x 5.0 m ± 1 m r t Detection area compact passimo KX (rectangular) Installation height (A) Head on to (r) Diagonally (t) A ux r t 2 m 28 m² 8 m x 3.5 m ± 1 m 53 m² 15 m x 3.5 m ± 1 m 2.5 m 36 m² 9 m x 4.0 m ± 1 m 60 m² 15 m x 4.0 m ± 1 m r t 3 m 45 m² 10 m x 4.5 m ± 1 m 68 m² 15 m x 4.5 m ± 1 m 3.5 m 50 m² 10 m x 5.0 m ± 1 m 75 m² 15 m x 5.0 m ± 1 m Accessories QuickSet: Details Page 232 clic: Details Page 231 QuickSafe: Details Page 231 Surface frame compact: Details Page Scale drawings ,5 17, ,5 29, httpadditional technical data at: Article number 195

196 Presence detector KX SYSTEMS ECO-IR 180EIB-AC Description Wall mounted passive infrared presence detector (PIR) For controlling lighting, ventilation etc., particularly in of ces and hallways Detection area 180 Genuine daylight measurement Automatic control of lighting and HVAC Presence output for HVAC control with switch-off delay ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay The lighting switches on with darkness and presence and off with suf cient light or absence The self-learning switch-off delay adjusts to occupants' behaviour Master or slave operating mode is selected via con guration Test operation mode checks the detection range and con guration The parameters are set by ETS or potentiometer The presence detector has "Genuine daylight measurement" and is only suitable for switching uorescent lamps (F/P) Choice of fully or semi automatic operation The presence detector detects moving bodies in a radius of approx. 8 m. Seated persons can be reliably detected in an area of 8 m x 4 m. The recommended installation height is 2.2 m BCU bus coupling unit KX necessary for operation Product selection Colour Type Article number Pure white (similar to RA 9010) ECO-IR 180EIB-AC Black (similar to RA 9005) ECO-IR 180EIB-AC BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) ECO-IR 180EIB-AC SR additional colours available upon request Required accessories BCU bus coupling unit KX Technical data ECO-IR 180EIB-AC 11 Operating voltage KX Bus voltage Recommended installation height m Brightness measuring range lx ight switch-off delay 30 s 20 min Presence switch-off delay 30 s 60 min Ambient temperature +0 C +45 C Protection rating IP 40 Detection area (semicircle) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) A m 32 m² 8 m x 4 m 100 m² Ø 16 m B C http Additional technical data at: Article number

197 SYSTEMS Presence detector KX Accessories BUS coupling unit KX (required) Art.o.: Details Page 232 QuickSafe Art.o.: Details Page 233 Surface frame ECO-IR 180 Art.o.: Details Page 231 Scale drawings ,3 21, httpadditional technical data at: Article number 197

198 Presence detector KX SYSTEMS Presence detectors ECO-IR 360EIB-AC, ECO-IR DUA-EIB Description Common functions Passive infrared presence detector (PIR) For controlling lighting, ventilation etc., particularly in of ces and hallways Square detection area Genuine daylight measurement The square detection area allows accurate and simple planning The lighting switches on with darkness and presence and off with suf cient light or absence The self-learning switch-off delay adjusts to occupants' behaviour Master or slave operating mode is selected via con guration. Test operation mode checks the detection range and con guration The parameters are set by ETS or potentiometer. The presence detector has "Genuine daylight measurement" and is only suitable for switching uorescent lamps (F/P). Choice of fully or semi automatic operation BCU bus coupling unit KX necessary for operation ECO-IR 360EIB-AC Automatic control of lighting and HVAC Presence output for HVAC control with switch-off delay ighting control with light threshold value and self-learning switch-off delay ECO-IR DUA-EIB Automatic control of two lighting zones ighting control with two light threshold values and self-learning switch-off delay Two brightness measurements Product selection Colour Type Article number Pure white (similar to RA 9010) ECO-IR 360EIB-AC Black (similar to RA 9005) ECO-IR 360EIB-AC BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) ECO-IR 360EIB-AC SR Pure white (similar to RA 9010) ECO-IR DUA-EIB Black (similar to RA 9005) ECO-IR DUA-EIB BK Silver (similar to RA 9006) ECO-IR DUA-EIB SR additional colours available upon request Required accessories BCU bus coupling unit KX Technical data ECO-IR 360EIB-AC ECO-IR DUA-EIB Operating voltage KX Bus voltage Recommended installation height m Brightness measuring range lx ight switch-off delay 30 s 20 min Presence switch-off delay 30 s 60 min Ambient temperature +0 C +45 C Protection rating IP 40 http Additional technical data at: Article number

199 SYSTEMS Presence detector KX Detection area (square) Installation height (A) Sitting (B) Walking (C) 2 m 20 m² 4.5 m x 4.5 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m ± 0.5 m A 0.8 B C ux 2.5 m 36 m² 6.0 m x 6.0 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m ± 0.5 m 3 m 49 m² 7.0 m x 7.0 m 81 m² 9.0 m x 9.0 m ± 0.5 m 3.5 m 64 m² 8.0 m x 8.0 m 100 m² 10.0 m x 10.0 m ± 1 m 4 m 121 m² 11.0 m x 11.0 m ± 1 m Accessories BUS coupling unit KX (required) Art.o.: Details Page 232 QuickFix round cover Details Page 233 QuickFix square cover Art.o.: Details Page 233 Additional accessories Pg. 232 QuickFix concrete round cover Details Page 232 QuickFix concrete square cover Details Page 232 QuickFix concrete ushmounted box Details Page 233 QuickFix concrete ushmounted housing Details Page 233 QuickSafe Details Page231 Surface frame ECO-IR 360 Details Page 232 Scale drawings ,5 46,3 21, ,5 37, ,5 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 199

200 Weather station, brightness sensors KX SYSTEMS Weather stations KX Weather station KX Weather station basic KX Description Weather station KX Combination sensor for measuring wind, rain, brightness and temperature Rain sensor with heater (with connection at 230 V AC) Brightness range from 1-100,000 lux Temperature range -20 C to + 55 C Measurement and evaluation directly on device Sun protection for up to three facades possible (in combination with UA 133) Display of weather data, e.g. with VARIA multi-function display Weather station basic KX ike weather station KX, however: Combination sensor for measuring wind, brightness and temperature Without rain sensor 230 V AC connection not required Product selection Technical data Type Article number KX weather station Weather station KX basic KX weather station Weather station KX basic Operating voltage 230 V AC Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Brightness measuring range lx Measuring range temperature 20 C +55 C Ambient temperature 20 C +55 C Protection class II in accordance with E Protection rating IP Accessories Mast mounting weather station Details Page 239 Scale drawings Weather station KX Weather station basic KX http Additional technical data at: Article number

201 SYSTEMS Weather station, brightness sensors KX UA 130 KX Description 3 channel brightness sensor For brightness-dependent controlling Threshold values, dimming levels and switch delay adjustable 3 threshold switches integrated Threshold can be set between 1 and 20,000 lux Behaviour adjustable if thresholds are exceeded or not met Up to 4 different brightness levels can be monitored Choice of lux or ,000 lux measuring ranges 3 con gurable thresholds Each section can be allocated one light setting consisting of 3 switching objects and 1 dimming object Product selection Type Article number UA 130 KX A Technical data UA 130 KX A Operating voltage KX Brightness measuring range Switch-on delay Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) lx 8 s 240 min Width 2 modules Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Accessories Flush-mounted light sensor UA KX Art.o.: Details Page httpadditional technical data at: Article number 201

202 Weather station, brightness sensors KX SYSTEMS UA 131 S KX Description Brightness and temperature sensor For brightness and temperature dependent controlling in outdoor areas 5 freely con gurable channels: 1 sun protection channel and 4 universal channels Sun protection channel with automised sun protection speci cally for blind, awning and shutter applications Universal channels allow linking of brightness and temperature Brightness range from 1-100,000 lux Temperature range -20 C to + 55 C earning object for brightness threshold Product selection Type Article number UA 131 S KX Technical data UA 131 S KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 5 ma) Brightness measuring range lx Measuring range temperature 25 C +55 C Ambient temperature 25 C +55 C Protection rating IP 54 Scale drawings ,5 81,5 http Additional technical data at: Article number

203 SYSTEMS Weather station, brightness sensors KX UA 133 KX Description Brightness sensor For brightness dependent controlling in outdoor areas Brightness range from 1-100,000 lux Ideally combinable with the Theben weather station for individual control of up to 3 facades Product selection Type Article number UA 133 KX Technical data UA 133 KX Operating voltage KX Brightness measuring range Bus voltage, (< 5 ma) lx Ambient temperature 25 C +55 C Protection rating IP 54 Scale drawings ,5 81,5 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 203

204 Digital time switches KX SYSTEMS Digital time switches TR 648 S DCF KX TR 644 S DCF KX Description Common functions 365-day time switch With daily, weekly, yearly, random, pulse and priority programs Free weekdays and channel blocks 1.5 years power reserve via replaceable environmentally-friendly lithium battery Movable public holidays can be automatically adjusted annually Automatic summer/winter time change Switching times are permanently stored in EEPROM Programming via key entry on device or OBISK 2.1 programming set Interface for OBEISK memory card (PC programming) Time and date synchronisation from other bus participants Time-dependent speci cation of different temperature levels for individual room control Time-dependent compulsory control (mainly O or OFF) by consumers via priority telegrams Random switching for presence simulation TR 648 S DCF KX 16 channel time switch with annual program Optional DCF77 radio Channels 1 to 4 can be programmed as astronomical switching channels (astronomical programs can only be programmed using OBEISH software) TR 644 S DCF KX 4 channel time switch with yearly program Optional DCF77 radio TR 644 S KX 4 channel time switch with yearly program Without DCF77 radio Product selection Type Article number 11 TR 648 S DCF KX TR 644 S DCF KX TR 644 S KX http Additional technical data at: Article number

205 SYSTEMS Digital time switches KX Technical data TR 648 S DCF KX TR 644 S DCF KX TR 644 S KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Operating voltage 230 V AC (only with DFC77 antenna connection) Width 6 modules umber of channels 16 4 umber of astronomical channels 4 umber of memory cells Time accuracy ± 1 s/day(quartz) or DCF77 ± 1 s/day(quartz) Shortest switching time 1 s Display CD Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E 60,335 Accessories Antenna DCF77 KX Art.o.: Details Page 228 OBEISK KX PC set Art.o.: Details Page 229 Memory card OBEISK KX 64 K For TR 648 S DCF KX Art.o.: Details Page 230 Memory card OBEISK KX 16 K For TR 644 S DCF KX Art.o.: Details Page 229 Connection example TR 648 S DCF KX TR 644 S DCF KX 11 KX DCF RC DCF KX DCF RC DCF httpadditional technical data at: Article number 205

206 Digital time switches KX SYSTEMS TR 612 S KX Description 2 channel weekly timer With screen to display: Day of the week, time, switching status etc. With daily and weekly programs 36 switching times 99 day holiday program; programmed in advance 6 year power reserve Automatic summer/winter time change Automatic program review Switching times are permanently stored in EEPROM Permanent O/OFF switching Product selection Type Article number TR 612 S KX Technical data TR 612 S KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 3.5 ma) Width 2 modules umber of channels 2 umber of memory cells 36 Time accuracy ± 1 s/day(quartz) Shortest switching time 1 min Display CD Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E http Additional technical data at: Article number

207 SYSTEMS System devices KX ZS 600 DCF KX Description Time transmitter for hour and date Can also be used with DCF77 antenna ED for status display DCF reception Integrated voltage supply for DCF77 antenna Preset time and date (CET or CEST) Automatic summer/winter time change Product selection Type Article number ZS 600 DCF KX Technical data ZS 600 DCF KX Operating voltage KX Width Power reserve Time accuracy Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) 2 modules 10 years ± 1 s/day(quartz) or DCF77 Ambient temperature 10 C +50 C Protection class III in accordance with E Protection rating IP 20 Accessories Antenna DCF77 KX Art.o.: Details Page httpadditional technical data at: Article number 207

208 System devices KX SYSTEMS Power supply 640 ma/320 ma/160 ma Power supply 640 ma Power supply 320 ma Power supply 160 ma Description Common functions KX-Supply voltage Produces and monitors the KX system voltage and 30 V DC auxiliary supply Reset key for 20 sec. bus reset Continuous short-circuit protection Power supply 640 ma 640 ma supply voltage Power supply 320 ma 320 ma supply voltage Power supply 160 ma 160 ma supply voltage Product selection Type Article number Power supply 640 ma Power supply 320 ma * Power supply 160 ma * *Available May 2010 Technical data Power supply 640 ma Power supply 320 ma Power supply 160 ma 11 Operating voltage 230 V AC, Hz Width 6 modules 4 modules KX Output 1 line with integrated throttle valve KX nominal voltage 30 V DC, ± 2 V, SEV 30 V Output 1 (unthrottled) 30 V nominal voltage 30 V DC, ± 2 V, SEV ominal current 640 ma 320 ma 160 ma Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection class II in accordance with E Protection rating IP 20 http Additional technical data at: Article number

209 SYSTEMS System devices KX Interface USB KX, ine coupler KX Interface USB KX ine coupler KX Description Interface USB KX USB interface For communication between PC and the KX equipment to be programmed USB ED and KX ED to display data transmission Usable from ETS3 V1.0 ine coupler KX ine coupler For connecting KX lines or areas Galvanic separation of the lines/areas Bus terminals for main line and subordinate line Telegrams can be ltered (to reduce telegram traf c) Can also be used as line ampli er (repeater) Product selection Type Article number Interface USB KX ine coupler KX Technical data Interface USB KX ine coupler KX Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 10 ma) Width 2 modules Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C Protection class II in accordance with E III in accordance with E 60,730-1 Protection rating IP httpadditional technical data at: Article number 209

210 Display units KX SYSTEMS KX indoor clock OSIRIA 220 AR KX OSIRIA 242 SR KX OSIRIA 280 B KX Description OSIRIA 220 AR KX KX indoor clock, round, single-sided Black bar hour and minute hands, red second hand Black DI bar hour and minute hands, red second hand OSIRIA 230 AR KX/OSIRIA 230 SR KX OSIRIA 240 AR KX/OSIRIA 240 SR KX OSIRIA 241 AR KX/OSIRIA 241 BR KX Description like OSIRIA 220 AR KX OSIRIA 242 AR KX/OSIRIA 242 SR KX KX indoor clock, round, double-sided With wall or ceiling holder (150 mm) Black bar hour and minute hands, red second hand OSIRIA 251 BQ KX KX indoor clock, square, single-sided Wall clocks protected against thrown balls e.g. for sports halls, schools, etc. Black bar hour and minute hands, red second hand 3-point fastening resistant to being pried out OSIRIA 232 BQ KX KX indoor clock, square, single-sided, for ush-mounted installation (for OP rooms) Black bar hour and minute hands, red second hand Resistant to acids, cleaning agents and disinfectants; in the installed state protected against dust and water in acc. with protection rating IP 54 (DI 40050) OSIRIA 280 B KX KX indoor clock, digital, square, singlesided Analogue clock with 1-line, 9-segment CD digital display for date Free-wheel black bar hand, red second hand Additional clocks upon request. 11 Additional information about these products can be found at http Additional technical data at: Article number

211 SYSTEMS Display units KX Product selection Dimensions Clock face Ø 250 mm Ø 300 mm Ø 400 mm 250 mm x 250 mm Ø 280 mm Housing material Clock face Type Article number Impact-resistant plastic housing, matt border or chrome-plated metal housing, at shock-resistant Plexiglas Chromium-plated metal housing, domed, shock-resistant Plexiglas White painted metallic housing (RA 9016), shock-resistant Plexiglass White painted metallic housing (RA 9016), laminated safety glass Stainless steel housing frame ush with tiles or wall V4A for wall installation ( ush-mounted), 3 mm at mineral lens Flat metal housing, o front lens White metallic dial, black Arabic numerals White metallic dial, black ne-line numerals White metallic dial, black Arabic numerals White metallic dial, black ne-line numerals White metallic dial, black Arabic numerals White metallic dial, black bar numerals White dials, black Arabic numerals White metallic dial, black ne-line numerals White metallic dial, black bar numerals Faces with black ne line numerals OSIRIA 220 AR KX OSIRIA 230 AR KX OSIRIA 230 SR KX OSIRIA 240 AR KX OSIRIA 240 SR KX OSIRIA 241 AR KX OSIRIA 241 BR KX OSIRIA 242 AR KX OSIRIA 242 SR KX OSIRIA 251 BQ KX OSIRIA 232 BQ KX OSIRIA 280 B KX Technical data OSIRIA Operating voltage KX Bus voltage, (< 5 ma) Power reserve 10 days Ambient temperature 5 C +45 C 11 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 211

212 SYSTEMS http Additional technical data at: Article number 212

213 Section overview SYSTEMS iving comfort control Description Type Page Switching UXOR UXOR switching UXOR UXOR Dimming UXOR dimming UXOR DMB 2 S 216 Roller shutter control UXOR shutter control UXOR UXOR Weather sensors UXOR UXOR weather sensors UXOR UXOR Clock module UXOR clock module UXOR UXOR Sets UXOR Sets UXOR Set UXOR Set httpadditional technical data at: Article number 213

214 iving comfort control Switching SYSTEMS UXOR switching UXOR 400 UXOR 404 UXOR 402 Description Common functions Modular expandable system with central functions For switching electrical consumers Manual switch on device EDs to display 2 time functions (staircase light function with switch-off warning, lag function) Upgradeable for up to 16 UXOR modules Central O/OFF, panic function and presence simulation UXOR modules are connected via 2-wire bus cable (COM bus) Max. input cable length up to 100 m Input separate for connecting FI (RCD) Universal voltage input: 8 48 V AC/DC (e. g. for intercoms) Control for con guring central functions UXOR channel basic device for lighting control Selector switch for con guring central functions Inputs U1 and I4 oating UXOR channel extension device for lighting control Input I4 oating UXOR channel extension device for lighting control Input I4 oating Product selection Type Article number UXOR UXOR UXOR http Additional technical data at: Article number

215 SYSTEMS iving comfort control Switching Technical data UXOR 400 UXOR 404 UXOR 402 Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Width 4 modules 2 modules Power consumption 4 VA Installation type DI-rail Type of contact O contact Connecting cable 230 V phase-independent supply cable, cable length max. 100 m Connection for COM Any cross-section/max. length 100 m Switching capacity 16 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 6 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 0.6) Ambient temperature 10 C +50 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Diode module UXOR Art.o.: Details Page 239 Front panel kit Art.o.: Details Page 228 Connection example * * * * * * = UXOR U I4 I4 () () C4 I1 I2 I3 COM + S I1 I2 S1 S2 P S UXOR 400 COM UXOR C1 C2 C3 C4 D1 D2 I1 I2 I3 I4 G1 COM UXOR C1 C2 C2 C3 C3 COM UXOR C1 C2 COM + C3 UXOR M M M httpadditional technical data at: Article number 215

216 iving comfort control Dimming SYSTEMS UXOR dimming UXOR 405 DMB 2 S Description UXOR channel universal dimmer For dimming electric consumers such as incandescent lamps, high-voltage halogen lamps, low-voltage halogen lamps with conventional or electronic transformers 300 W/VA (for 2 channels) or 500 W/VA (for 1 channel) For conventional and electronic transformers Can also be used without basic module Manual switch on device EDs to display Upgradeable for up to 16 UXOR modules UXOR modules are connected via 2-wire bus cable (COM bus) One additional input per channel for motion detector With overcurrent display Input for up to 3 light settings 4 program options for dimming response Central functions: Presence simulation, central OFF, panic function, central O DMB 2 S 2-way dimming output extension 'Dimmbooster' for UXOR 405 To double the output of basic and extension modules. e. g. to: 2 x 600 W/VA (1 channel) or 1 x 1,000 W/VA (2 channels) ED switching status display for each channel Product selection Technical data 12 Type Article number UXOR DMB 2 S UXOR 405 DMB 2 S Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Width 4 modules Power consumption 3 VA Installation type DI-rail umber of channels 2 Outputs semi-conductor Triacs Connecting cable 230 V phase-independent supply cable, cable length max. 100 m Connection for COM Any cross-section/max. length 100 m Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E http Additional technical data at: Article number

217 SYSTEMS iving comfort control Shutter control UXOR shutter control UXOR 408 UXOR 409 Description Common functions For controlling shutters, awnings or blinds Separate control of 4 shutters with UP/DOW/STOP Manual switch on device EDs to display Controllable via standard shutter sensor Upgradeable for up to 16 UXOR modules UXOR modules are connected via 2-wire bus cable (COM bus) Setting option for panic function (via UXOR 400) Storable intermediate position and turn for shading and ventilation UXOR channel roller shutter basic module Central UP/DOW, panic 1 group With three group functions (individual, group and central control) Expandable via channel extension modules, time and sensor module and weather station UXOR channel shutter extension module Product selection Technical data Type Article number UXOR UXOR UXOR 408 UXOR 409 Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Width 4 modules Power consumption 4 VA Installation type DI-rail umber of channels 4 Type of contact O contact Connecting cable 230 V phase-independent supply cable, cable length max. 100 m Connection for COM Any cross-section/max. length 100 m Switching capacity 6 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1) Function channels for shutter, blind and awning control Ambient temperature 10 C +50 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E httpadditional technical data at: Article number 217

218 iving comfort control Weather sensors SYSTEMS UXOR sensor technology UXOR 411 UXOR 412 UXOR 413 Description UXOR 411 Sensor module For controlling awnings, shutters and blinds in combination with UXOR 412 and/or 413 and integrated light sensors Setting threshold values on device EDs to display Max. input cable length of sensor line is 100 m UXOR modules are connected via 2-wire bus cable (COM bus) UXOR 412 Weather sensor For controlling awnings, shutters and blinds depending on rain, wind velocity, temperature and brightness in combination with sensor module UXOR 411 Optional connection of up to two additional light sensors for additional facades Supply voltage via COM-Bus UXOR 413 Wind sensor For controlling awnings, shutters and blinds depending on wind velocity in combination with sensor module UXOR 411 Extra power unit required Optional connection of up to three additional facades with automatic sun protection function Product selection Type Article number UXOR UXOR UXOR http Additional technical data at: Article number

219 SYSTEMS iving comfort control Weather sensors Technical data UXOR 411 UXOR 412 UXOR 413 Operating voltage 230 V AC COM-Bus 24 V DC Frequency 50 Hz Width 4 modules Power consumption 5.5 VA Installation type DI-rail Wall or mast installation Connection for COM Any cross-section / max. length 100 m Setting range twilight value lx Setting range sun protection lx Measuring range wind velocity 2 20 m/s Measuring range temperature +0 C +60 C Ambient temperature 10 C +50 C 20 C +55 C Protection rating IP 20 IP 44 IP 43 Protection class II in accordance with E III in accordance with E 60,730-1 Accessories Surface-mounted light sensor For UXOR 411 Art.o.: Details Page 235 Mast mounting weather station For UXOR 412, UXOR 413 Art.o.: Details Page 239 Power unit 24 V DC For UXOR 413 Art.o.: Details Page 239 Scale drawings UXOR 412 UXOR httpadditional technical data at: Article number 219

220 iving comfort control Clock module SYSTEMS UXOR 414 Description 8 channel time switch For control of any outputs in UXOR system, e. g. shutters, blinds and awnings or for lighting control Manual switch on device Daily and weekly programs Astronomical program (dependent on sunrise and sunset) Freely programmable switching times as well as pre-programmed astronomical switching times Easy location input via city list Individual link of time switch channels with the outputs via selector switch Positioning of drives (UXOR 408/ UXOR 409) as well as transmission of dimming values (UXOR 405) as percentage values Blocking times for suppression of brightness or twilight signals from sensor module (UXOR 411) Astronomical blocking times for time shifts for moving shutters/awnings up and down Automatic changeover summer/winter time UXOR modules are connected via 2-wire bus cable (COM bus) Product selection Type Article number UXOR Technical data Operating voltage 230 V AC Frequency 50 Hz Width 2.5 modules Power consumption 4 VA Installation type DI-rail umber of channels 8 UXOR 414 Connection for COM Any cross-section/ max. length 100 m umber of memory cells 128 Ambient temperature 10 C +50 C Protection rating IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E http Additional technical data at: Article number

221 SYSTEMS iving comfort control Clock module UXOR Sets UXOR Set 3 UXOR Set 4 Description UXOR Set 3 Set for the comfortable single family house with 10 separate lighting units and 4 time functions Additional dimming channels e. g. for living room and bedrooms This set also offers the advantage of central functions Suitable for 10 separate lighting units, 4 x time/switch and 4 x switch, 2 x dimming Consisting of: Box, 1 UXOR 400, 1 UXOR 404, 1 UXOR 405 UXOR Set 4 Set for shutter and blind controlling 8 drives can be manually or automatically controlled according to time program or sunrise or sunset Blocking times for time shifts for moving shutters/awnings up and down in the early morning Additional comfortable central functions Suitable for shutter and blind 8 drives, 8 drives and 8 time channels with weekly program with astronomical function Consisting of: Box, 1 UXOR 408, 1 UXOR 409, 1 UXOR 414 Product selection Type Article number UXOR Set UXOR Set httpadditional technical data at: Article number 221

222 SYSTEMS http Additional technical data at: Article number 222

223 Section overview SYSTEMS Controller umber of inputs umber of outputs Operating voltage Type Page Controller V AC PHARAO-II 10 (AC) V DC PHARAO-II 11 (DC) V AC PHARAO-II 14 (AC) V DC PHARAO-II 15 (DC) V AC PHARAO-II 24 (AC) V DC PHARAO-II 25 (DC) V AC PHARAO-II upgrade 4AR (AC) V DC UA 131 DDC V AC SUD 228 II httpadditional technical data at: Article number 223

224 Controller Controller SYSTEMS PHARAO controller devices PHARAO-II 10 (AC) PHARAO-II 24 (AC) PHARAO-II upgrade 4AR (AC) Description Common functions Small control unit for house automation and industry Programming directly on device via eight buttons without interface cable Backlit CD display with operator guidance in clear text Input and output switching status display ifespan of relay contacts is 100,000 switching cycles at nominal current Assignment of programmed functions on front keys Internal EEPROM memory for max. 200 function blocks (5,000 bytes) Optional plug-in EEPROM for program transfer or dual programming of internal and plugged-in EEPROM 3-level password protection Realtime year clock with 1,000 switching times Graphical programming software for Windows 95/98/T/2000/ME/XP with detailed online Help documentation Remote control/remote monitoring possible via modem/gsm modem Transmission of SMS, or fax PHARAO-II 10 (AC) Operating voltage V AC 6 digital inputs, e. g. for keys, brightness and temperature switches 4 relay outputs PHARAO-II 11 (DC) Operating voltage 24 V DC 6 digital/analogue inputs 4 relay outputs PHARAO-II 14 (AC) Operating voltage V AC 8 digital inputs, e. g. for keys, brightness and temperature switches 6 relay outputs PHARAO-II 15 (DC) Operating voltage 24 V DC 8 digital/analogue inputs 6 relay outputs PHARAO-II 24 (AC) Operating voltage V AC 15 digital inputs, e. g. for keys, brightness and temperature switches 9 relay outputs PHARAO-II 25 (DC) Operating voltage 24 V DC 15 inputs, including 8 analogue/digital options 9 relay outputs PHARAO-II upgrade 4AR (AC) 4 channel relay output upgrade Product selection 13 umber of inputs umber of outputs Operating voltage Type Article number V AC PHARAO-II 10 (AC) V DC PHARAO-II 11 (DC) V AC PHARAO-II 14 (AC) V DC PHARAO-II 15 (DC) V AC PHARAO-II 24 (AC) V DC PHARAO-II 25 (DC) V AC PHARAO-II upgrade 4AR (AC) http Additional technical data at: Article number

225 SYSTEMS Controller Controller Technical data PHARAO-II 10 (AC) PHARAO-II 11 (DC) PHARAO-II 14 (AC) PHARAO-II 15 (DC) PHARAO-II 24 (AC) PHARAO-II 25 (DC) PHARAO-II upgrade 4AR (AC) Operating voltage V AC 24 V DC V AC 24 V DC V AC 24 V DC V AC Frequency Hz Hz Hz Hz Power consumption 5 VA 4 VA 5.5 VA 7.5 VA 7 VA 9 VA Installation type DI-rail Type of contact O contact Display CD Width 4 modules 7 modules Power reserve 20 days Time accuracy ± 5 s/day(quartz) Max. switching capacity 8 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1), 373 VA (at 250 V AC, inductive load) 4 x 8 A (250 V AC, cos =1), inductive load max. 373 VA, 5 x 2 A (250 V AC, cos =1), inductive load max. 93 VA 2 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1) Input frequency 5 Hz 20 Hz Ambient temperature 25 C +55 C Type of protection IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Power unit 24 V DC Art.o.: Details Page 239 Memory module PHARAO-II Art.o.: Details Page 239 Programming software PHARAO Art.o.: Details Page 239 Additional accessories GSM cable PHARAO-II Details Page 239 Programming cable PHARAO Details Page 239 Connection example PHARAO-II 10 (AC) OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT httpadditional technical data at: Article number 225

226 Controller Controller SYSTEMS PHARAO Accessories UA 131 DDC SUD 228 II Description UA 131 DDC Combination sensor with analogue output signal Can be used for brightness and temperature measurement Each of the two measurement outputs represents a 0 10 V analogue output signal The sensor can be connected directly to the analogue inputs of the PHARAO devices (24 V DC) Controls and regulators can be programmed with the signal converter, range compare and Schmitt trigger function modules External 24 V DC power unit required SUD 228 II Charging switch for electric storage heaters Adjustable charging time and backward control If the ripple control receiver or the tariff time switch have been released for nighttime off-peak tariff, the device starts the charging program for storage heating Charging time can be set from 0 9 hours Onscreen display of charging time which is repeated every 24 hours Backward control stops charging process at the end of off-peak period Manual switch can be connected for daytime charging Product selection Type Article number UA 131 DDC SUD 228 II http Additional technical data at: Article number

227 SYSTEMS Controller Controller Technical data UA 131 DDC SUD 228 II Operating voltage 24 V DC V AC Frequency Hz Power consumption 3 VA Installation type DI-rail Type of contact O contact Display CD Max. switching capacity 8 A (at 250 V AC, cos = 1) Ambient temperature 30 C +70 C +0 C +55 C Type of protection IP 54 IP 20 Protection class II in accordance with E Accessories Connection example Power unit 24 V DC Art.o.: Details Page 239 SUD 228 II OUT 1 Scale drawings UA 131 DDC ,5 81,5 13 httpadditional technical data at: Article number 227

228 ACCESSORIES Antenna DCF77 Antenna DCF77 KX Description Suitable for Type Article number Time synchronisation with DCF antennas. To ensure good reception, do not install the antenna in cellars or on distribution boxes. Connection is made via separate 2-wire, unscreened high-voltage power cable (max. 100 m), up to 10 Theben devices can be connected. Polarity, short-circuit and interruption of the antenna circuit are each visually displayed. TR 641 S DCF TR 642 S DCF TR 644 S DCF SEEKTA 173 DCF Antenna DCF Time synchronisation with DCF antennas for KX time switches Installation see DCF77 antennas TR 648 S DCF KX TR 644 S DCF KX ZS 600 DCF KX Antenna DCF77 KX Antenna top2 RC-DCF Antenna top2 RC-GPS Front panel kit Time synchronisation with DCF antennas for top2 devices Installation see DCF77 antennas Worldwide time synchronisation and positioning via receiving GPS satellite signal. The antenna is connected by a 2 wire cable (max. 100 m) to Theben top2 RC devices (up to 10 devices can be connected). A top2 GPS power unit (item number ) is also required when connecting to TR 611 op2 RC, UA 121 top2 RC, UA 122 top2 RC or SEEKTA 171 top2 RC devices. o additional power un it is required when connecting to TR 641 top2 RC, TR 642 top2 RC, TR 644 top2 RC devices or several devices to one antenna. Positioning is possible with TR 641 top2 RC, TR 642 top2 RC, TR 644 top2 RC and SEEKTA 171 top2 RC devices. TR 611 top2 RC UA 121 top2 RC UA 122 top2 RC SEEKTA 171 top2 RC TR 641 top2 RC TR 642 top2 RC TR 644 top2 RC TR 611 top2 RC UA 121 top2 RC UA 122 top2 RC SEEKTA 171 top2 RC TR 641 top2 RC TR 642 top2 RC TR 644 top2 RC Antenna top2 RC-DCF Antenna top2 RC-GPS (Available July 2010) Front panel installation set is suitable for Theben DI rail installation devices of 17.5 to mm width. Walls from 1 to 5 mm thick All DI rail installation devices Front panel kit Terminal cover 52.5 mm Terminal box cover plate for assembly, sealable TM 178 h SY 168 h SU 188 h SU 188 g MEM 198 h SU 188 hw TM 171 h SY 161 h SU 181 h Terminal cover 52.5 mm http Additional technical data at: Article number

229 ACCESSORIES Power unit DCF77 Description Suitable for Type Article number Power unit for DCF antenna Width 2 modules (35 mm) TR 641 S DCF TR 642 S DCF TR 644 S DCF Power unit DCF Power unit top2 GPS OBEISK PC set OBEISK KX PC set ecessary for antennas top2 RC-GPS in combination with TR 611 top2 RC, UA 121 top2 RC, UA 122 top2 RC or SEE- KTA 171 top2 RC (the power unit is not necessary when 2 or more devices are connected to the antenna) Width 2 modules (35 mm) OBEISK memory card, RS 232 plug-in adapter, software TR 611 top2 RC UA 121 top2 RC UA 122 top2 RC SEEKTA 171 top2 RC TR 641 S TR 641 S DCF TR 642 S TR 642 S DCF TR 644 S TR 644 S DCF SEEKTA 173 DCF Power unit top2 GPS (Available July 2010) OBEISK PC set OBEISK KX memory card 16 K, RS 232 plug-in adapter, software TR 648 S DCF KX TR 644 S DCF KX OBEISK KX PC set OBEISK top2 PC set OBEISK top2 memory card, USB plug-in adapter, software Updates of existing OBEISK top2 software are available as free downloads at TR top2 UA top2 SEEKTA top2 OBEISK top2 PC set Quick fastening 72 x 72 Snap-on mounting for 35 mm DI rails All time switches for front panel/wall installation Quick fastening 72 x Memory card OBEISK KX 16 K Individual memory card TR 644 S DCF KX Memory card OBEISK KX 16 K httpadditional technical data at: Article number 229

230 ACCESSORIES Memory card OBEISK KX 64 K Description Suitable for Type Article number Individual memory card TR 648 S DCF KX Memory card OBEISK KX 64 K Memory card OBEISK Individual memory card TR 641 S TR 641 S DCF TR 642 S TR 642 S DCF TR 644 S TR 644 S DCF SEEKTA 173 DCF Memory card OBEISK Memory card OBEISK top2 Individual memory card TR top2 UA top2 SEEKTA top2 Memory card OBEISK top Wall mounting kit 17.5 mm Wall installation set for top mounting, sealable All DI rail installation devices with 1 module width Wall mounting kit 17.5 mm Wall mounting kit 35 mm Wall installation set for top mounting, sealable All DI rail installation devices with 2 modules width Wall mounting kit 35 mm Wall mounting kit 52.5 mm Wall installation set for top mounting, sealable All DI rail installation devices with 3 modules width Wall mounting kit 52.5 mm Wall mounting kit 70 mm 14 Wall installation set for top mounting, sealable All DI rail installation devices with 4 modules width Wall mounting kit 70 mm http Additional technical data at: Article number

231 ACCESSORIES Wall mounting kit 105 mm Description Suitable for Type Article number Wall installation set for top mounting, sealable All DI rail installation devices with 6 modules width Wall mounting kit 105 mm Cover 55 x 55 for BZ Cover for hour counters BZ Cover 55 x 55 for BZ Cover 72 x 72 for BZ Cover for hour counters BZ Cover 72 x 72 for BZ Front kit BZ Terminal box cover plate for hour counters BZ Front-kit BZ Clamp BZ Clamping bracket for hour counters BZ BZ BZ 146 BZ 147 Clamp BZ Plug-in socket BZ Plug-in base for hour counters BZ Plug-in socket BZ Surface frame ECO-IR 180 Presence detector surface frame ECO-IR 180A ECO-IR V ECO-IR 180EIB-AC Surface frame ECO-IR httpadditional technical data at: Article number 231

232 ACCESSORIES Surface frame ECO-IR 360 Description Suitable for Type Article number Presence detector surface frame All ECO-IR 360 ECO-IR DUA-EIB Surface frame ECO-IR Surface frame Presenceight Presence detector surface frame Presenceight 180 Presenceight 360 Surface frame Presenceight Surface frame compact Presence detector surface frame All compact of ce All compact passage/passimo Surface frame compact Bus coupling unit KX Required for various presence detectors For ush-mounted installation ECO-IR 180EIB-AC ECO-IR 360EIB-AC ECO-IR DUA-EIB Bus coupling unit KX RC lter Suppression lter for presence and motion detectors All presence and motion detectors RC lter QuickFix concrete square cover QuickFix concrete, ush-mounted socket for concrete Flush ceiling installation The presence detector is inserted into the false ceiling using a ush-mounted socket, just leaving pyramid lense visible ECO-IR 360A ECO-IR 360C T ECO IR DUA C T ECO-IR V ECO-IR 360EIB-AC ECO-IR DUA-EIB QuickFix concrete square cover QuickFix concrete round cover QuickFix concrete, ush-mounted socket for concrete Flush ceiling installation The presence detector is inserted into the false ceiling using a ush-mounted socket, just leaving pyramid lense visible ECO-IR 360A ECO-IR 360C T ECO IR DUA C T ECO-IR V ECO-IR 360EIB-AC ECO-IR DUA-EIB QuickFix concrete round cover http Additional technical data at: Article number

233 ACCESSORIES QuickFix square cover QuickFix housing For false ceilings Flush ceiling installation Description Suitable for Type Article number The presence detector is inserted into the false ceiling, just leaving pyramid lense visible ECO-IR 360A ECO-IR 360C T ECO IR DUA C T ECO-IR V ECO-IR 360EIB-AC ECO-IR DUA-EIB QuickFix square cover QuickFix round cover QuickFix housing For false ceilings Flush ceiling installation The presence detector is inserted into the false ceiling, just leaving pyramid lense visible ECO-IR 360A ECO-IR 360C T ECO IR DUA C T ECO-IR V ECO-IR 360EIB-AC ECO-IR DUA-EIB QuickFix round cover QuickFix concrete ush-mounted box QuickFix ush-mounted socket concrete ECO-IR 360A ECO-IR 360C T ECO IR DUA C T ECO-IR V ECO-IR 360EIB-AC ECO-IR DUA-EIB QuickFix concrete ush-mount box QuickFix concrete ush-mounted housing QuickFix housing Incl. ush-mounted socket ECO-IR 360A ECO-IR 360C T ECO IR DUA C T ECO-IR V ECO-IR 360EIB-AC ECO-IR DUA-EIB QuickFix concrete ush-mount housing QuickSafe QuickSafe safety cover Secure protection against damage Robust and solid design Particularly impact resistant and vandalproof 6 screws, 3 rawlplugs and 3 spacers All Theben HTS presence detectors QuickSafe Junction casing, 115 x 115 x 100mm Agro/Kaiser ush-mounted junction box/connection box PlanoCentro 101-UWH/000-UWH Junction casing, 115 x 115 x 100 mm clic Infrared remote control for ThebenHTS presence detectors Switching and dimming of lighting, scene control 2 channels for 2 lighting groups 2 programmable scenes 5 group addresses for de ning channels Coding switch and programming key for the easy allocation of lighting groups and channels All remote controlled ThebenHTS presence detectors, except Plano- Centro clic httpadditional technical data at: Article number 233

234 ACCESSORIES QuickSet plus SendoClic SendoPro 868-A UXA corner angle black Description Suitable for Type Article number Infrared remote control for the convenient startup of ThebenHTS presence detectors Rapid adjustment to changed operating conditions without uninstalling detectors Transmission of individual settings or complete value packages to the detector Call up of pre-de ned value packets for typical rooms Storing and calling-up 8 user-de ned value packets Onscreen text guidance Infrared remote control for PlanoCentro Switching and dimming of lighting, scene control 2 channels for 2 lighting groups 2 programmable scenes 5 group addresses for de ning channels Coding switch and programming key for the easy allocation of lighting groups and channels Infrared remote control for the convenient startup of HTS presence detectors Compatible with PlanoCentro, compact, Presenceight and ECO-IR C T The SendoPro 868A management remote control for the electrician enables ef cient start-up and exible adaptation to new applications. Rapid adjustment of parameters to changed operating conditions without uninstalling detectors Transmission of individual settings or complete con guration sets to the detector Select con gurations from PlanoCentro Calling up of pre-de ned value packets for typical rooms Saving and calling up user-de ned parameter sets on internal memory or SD card Updates via SD card All remote controlled ThebenHTS presence detectors, except PlanoCentro QuickSet plus PlanoCentro SendoClic All remote controlled ThebenHTS presence detectors SendoPro 868-A For corner installation of motion detectors Wall installation, external corner installation UXA UXA UXA corner angle black UXA corner angle white For corner installation of motion detectors Wall installation, external corner installation UXA UXA UXA UXA corner angle white SPHIX corner angle 14 For corner installation of motion detectors Wall installation, external corner installation SPHIX SPHIX SPHIX SPHIX KX SPHIX corner angle http Additional technical data at: Article number

235 ACCESSORIES SPHIX RC 104 Description Suitable for Type Article number User remote control for SPHIX 104 O/OFF/Automatic Teach-in function for teaching in the current brightness value SPHIX SPHIX /2 SPHIX AP SPHIX /2 AP SPHIX RC SPHIX RC 104 Pro SPHIX RC 105 Service remote control for SPHIX 104 O/OFF Teach-in function for teaching in the current brightness value Pre-de ned brightness values and switch-on times Impulse, reset and test function Block function SPHIX SPHIX /2 SPHIX AP SPHIX /2 AP SPHIX RC 104 Pro User remote control for SPHIX 105 O/OFF (2 hr, 4 hr, continuous) Automatic Teach-in function for teaching in the current brightness value SPHIX SPHIX SPHIX SPHIX KX SPHIX RC SPHIX RC 105 Pro Surface frame UXA Service remote control for SPHIX 105 O/OFF Teach-in function for teaching in the current brightness value Pre-de ned brightness values and switch-on times Impulse, reset and test function Block function Creep under protection O/OFF SPHIX SPHIX SPHIX SPHIX KX SPHIX RC 105 Pro Motion detector surface frame UXA UXA T Surface frame UXA UA star adapter plate The adapter plate simpli es the replacement of faulty twilight switches from Eberle, ESYUX, egrand, Grässlin, Hager, Merten, Senmatic, Theben etc. The plate has standard xing holes, so no further holes need to be drilled in the facade. 2 installation screws included UA 126 star UA 127 star UA 128 star UA 129 star-time UA star adapter plate Surface-mounted light sensor Rotating sensor With mounting bracket and terminal screws Protection rating IP 54 UA 108 UXOR 411 UA 130 KX Surface-mounted light sensor httpadditional technical data at: Article number 235

236 ACCESSORIES Analogue surface-mounted light sensor Rotating sensor Quick fastening Description Suitable for Type Article number With mounting bracket and screw terminals Protection rating IP 55 UA 108 UA 109 UA 110 UA 120 top2 Analogue surfacemounted light sensor Digital surface-mounted light sensor Rotating sensor Quick fastening With mounting bracket and screw terminals Protection rating IP 55 UA 111 top2 UA 112 top2 UA 121 top2 RC UA 122 top2 RC Digital surfacemounted light sensor Analogue ush-mounted light sensor Connecting cable 1.5 m Protection rating IP 65 UA 108 UA 109 UA 110 UA 120 top2 Analogue ushmounted light sensor Digital ush-mounted light sensor Screwless terminals Protection rating IP 66 UA 111 top2 UA 112 top2 UA 121 top2 RC UA 122 top2 RC Digital ush-mounted light sensor Flush-mounted light sensor UA KX Connecting cable 1.5 m, protection rating IP 65 UA 130 KX Flush-mounted light sensor UA KX Power unit CO 2 sensor 24 V/12 W ush-mounted power unit AMU 716 R Power unit CO 2 sensor (Available May 2010) Adapter RAMSES 72x/78x Wallpaper/wall cover plate for replacement of RAMSES 3 devices with new clock thermostats, e. g. RAMSES 722 All analogue clock thermostats Adapter RAMSES 72x/78x Adapter plate RAMSES 70x Adapter plate for ush-mounted socket 79 x 79 mm RAMSES Adapter plate RAMSES 70x Adapter plate RAMSES 714 Adapter plate for ush-mounted socket 79 x 79 mm SOTHIS 715 RAMSES 714 RAMSES 714 A RAMSES 714 A/FH Adapter plate RAMSES http Additional technical data at: Article number

237 ACCESSORIES Flow temperature sensor Description Suitable for Type Article number Also required for applications with 2 feed sensors RAMSES 855 top2 OT RAMSES OT Center Flow temperature sensor Antenna RAMSES 813/833 External temperature sensor 1 For 868 MHz with wall holder and 2 m screened connection cable (only required in event of poor reception quality). External temperature sensor RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set 1 RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 1 RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 2 All RAMSES with external inputs CHEOPS control KX CHEOPS drive KX RAMSES 713 S KX Antenna RAMSES 813/833 External temperature sensor External temperature sensor 2 With temperature adjustment of ± 3 K All RAMSES with external inputs External temperature sensor External temperature sensor IP 65 External temperature sensor Protection rating IP 65 All RAMSES with external inputs External temperature sensor IP Temperature sensor GSM modem Temperature sensor for laying in oor RAMSES 712 KX RAMSES 713 S KX FCA 1 KX RAMSES 831 top2 RAMSES 832 top2 RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 1/Set 2 Temperature sensor Incl. antenna, power unit and connecting cables RAMSES 816 top RAMSES 817 top RAMSES 855 top GSM modem RAMSES OT Center Extends the RAMSES 855 top with an additional mixer circuit, chimney sweep function, and a relay output for error messages RAMSES 855 top2 OT RAMSES OT Center httpadditional technical data at: Article number 237

238 ACCESSORIES Frame RAMSES 74x Description Suitable for Type Article number Frame for mechanical clock thermostat Without central part RAMSES 741 RAMSES 746 RAMSES 748 Frame RAMSES 74x Socket RAMSES Plug-in socket for installing the RAMSES HF clock thermostat on the wall RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set A/Set S/Set 1 RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 1/Set2 Socket RAMSES Actuator APHA V Actuator APHA 4 24 V Actuator for radiators, heating circuit distributors or individual heating circuits Operating voltage 230 V AC "First open function" for easy installation and heating start-up Plug-in installation on valve adapters 100 % protection against damaging drives through leaking valves Function and adjustment checking Protection against disassembly by means of removable SaveGuard Guaranteed overvoltage protection All RAMSES HMG 4 KX HME 4 KX Actuator APHA V ike actuator APHA V, however: Operating voltage 24 V All RAMSES HMG 4 KX HME 4 KX HMT 6 KX HMT 12 KX Actuator APHA 4 24 V Plunge sensor RAMSES Additionally required for applications with service water control or boiler plunge sensor RAMSES 855 top2 OT Plunge sensor RAMSES Valve adapter VA 78 Valve adapter for Danfoss RA Further valve adapters available upon request Actuator APHA V/24 V CHEOPS control KX CHEOPS drive KX Valve adapter VA Valve adapter VA 80 Valve adapters for Onda, Schlösser(from 1993), Oventrop (M30 x 1.5), Heimeier, Herb, Therm- Concept, Frank, Roth (distributor), Dinotherm (distributor). Further valve adapters available upon request Actuator APHA V/24 V CHEOPS control KX CHEOPS drive KX Valve adapter VA Central part RAMSES 741/748 Central part without switch section and setting button RAMSES 741 RAMSES 748 Central part RAMSES 741/ http Additional technical data at: Article number

239 ACCESSORIES Central part RAMSES 746 Description Suitable for Type Article number Central part with switch section and setting button RAMSES 746 Central part RAMSES Mast mounting weather station For mast installation of the weather station Diameter mm UXOR 412 UXOR 413 Weather station KX Weather station basic KX Mast mounting weather station Diode module UXOR Required for special functions (group/central function) 2 items included in delivery UXOR 400 UXOR 402 UXOR 404 UXOR 408 UXOR 409 Diode module UXOR GSM cable PHARAO-II Enables connection to be established and SMS data to be transmitted to mobile telephone, address or fax machine. All PHARAO controls GSM cable PHARAO-II Power unit 24 V DC Power pack for supply voltage from PHARAO controllers and sensors. Power unit suf cient for 5 x PhARAO-II 14/15 or 4 x PHARAO-II 24/25 controls Width 3 modules (52.5 mm) UA 131 DDC UXOR 413 All PHARAO controls Power unit 24 V DC Programming software PHARAO Software for PHARAO and PHARAO-II Generation CD for Windows 95/98/T/2000/ME/XP All PHARAO controls Programming software PHARAO Programming cable PHARAO For series connection (RS 232) to enable control programs to be con gured and parameterised. This cable is used to connect an analogue model for remote maintenance and remote control. All PHARAO controls Programming cable PHARAO Memory module PHARAO-II Plug-in external EEPROM memory module 5kB for transferring and/or downloading the program from or to the internal EEPROM system memory. Internal program is deactivated for as long as the external memory module is plugged in (dual programming). All PHARAO controls Memory module PHARAO-II httpadditional technical data at: Article number 239

240 A E Index 2010/2011 Type Article number EA/GTI number Page A Actuator APHA V Actuator APHA 4 24 V Adapter plate RAMSES 70x Adapter plate RAMSES Adapter RAMSES 72x/78x AMU 716 KX AMU 716 R AMU 716 USB Analogue ush-mounted light sensor Analogue surface-mounted light sensor Antenna DCF Antenna DCF77 KX Antenna RAMES 813/ Antenna top2 RC-DCF Antenna top2 RC-GPS B BME 6 KX BMG 6 KX Bus coupling unit KX BZ BZ V BZ V BZ V BZ BZ BZ BZ V BZ BZ BZ V BZ C Central part RAMSES 741/ Central part RAMSES CHEOPS control KX CHEOPS drive KX Clamp BZ clic compact of ce compact of ce 24V compact of ce 24V BK compact of ce 24V ux compact of ce 24V ux BK compact of ce 24V ux SR compact of ce 24V SR compact of ce BK compact of ce DIM compact of ce DIM BK compact of ce DIM SR compact of ce EIB compact of ce EIB BK compact of ce EIB SR compact of ce SR compact passage compact passage 24V compact passage 24V BK compact passage 24V SR Type Article number EA/GTI number Page compact passage BK compact passage KX compact passage KX BK compact passage KX SR compact passage SR compact passimo BK compact passimo KX BK compact passimo KX SR compact passimo KX WH compact passimo SR compact passimo WH Cover 55 x 55 for BZ Cover 72 x 72 for BZ D Digital ush-mounted light sensor Digital surface-mounted light sensor Diode module UXOR DMB 2 S KX DME 2 S KX DMG 2 S KX E ECO-IR 180A ECO-IR 180A BK ECO-IR 180A SR ECO-IR 180A-24V ECO-IR 180A-24V BK ECO-IR 180A-24V SR ECO-IR 180EIB-AC ECO-IR 180EIB-AC BK ECO-IR 180EIB-AC SR ECO-IR V ECO-IR V BK ECO-IR V SR ECO-IR 360A ECO-IR 360A BK ECO-IR 360A SR ECO-IR 360C T ECO-IR 360C T BK ECO-IR 360C T SR ECO-IR 360EIB-AC ECO-IR 360EIB-AC BK ECO-IR 360EIB-AC SR ECO-IR DUA-C T ECO-IR DUA-C T BK ECO-IR DUA-C T SR ECO-IR DUA-EIB ECO-IR DUA-EIB BK ECO-IR DUA-EIB SR EPA EPA EPA EPA EPA EPA EPA EPA EPA EM 4 top EM A top

241 Index 2010/2011 F P Type Article number EA/GTI number Page External temperature sensor External temperature sensor External temperature sensor IP F FCA 1 KX Flow temperature sensor Flush-mounted light sensor UA KX Frame RAMSES 74x FRI 77 g FRI 77 g FRI 77 h FRI 77 h Front panel kit Front-kit BZ G GSM cable PHARAO-II GSM modem H HME 4 KX HMG 4 KX HMT 12 KX HMT 6 KX I Interface USB KX J JME 4 24V DC KX JME 4 S KX JMG 4 24V DC KX JMG 4 S KX Junction casing 115 x 115 x 100 mm ine coupler KX UA 108 A UA 108 E UA 109 A UA 109 E UA 110 A UA 110 A UA 110 E UA 111 top2 A UA 111 top2 E UA 112 top2 A UA 112 top2 E UA 120 top2 A UA 120 top2 E UA 121 top2 RC A UA 121 top2 RC E UA 122 top2 RC A UA 122 top2 RC E UA 126 star UA 127 star UA 128 star UA 129 star-time UA 130 KX A UA 131 DDC UA 131 S KX UA 133 KX UA star adpater plate Type Article number EA/GTI number Page UXA UXA UXA UXA UXA UXA /150W UXA /150W UXA /500W UXA /500W UXA UXA T UXA UXA AP UXA / UXA /2 AP UXA corner angle black UXA corner angle white UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR Set UXOR Set M Mast mounting weather station MEM 190 a MEM 198 h Memory card OBEISK Memory card OBEISK KX 16 K Memory card OBEISK KX 64 K Memory card OBEISK top Memory module PHARAO-II O OBEISK KX PC set OBEISK PC set OBEISK top2 PC set OSIRIA 220 AR KX OSIRIA 230 AR KX OSIRIA 230 SR KX OSIRIA 232 BQ KX OSIRIA 240 AR KX OSIRIA 240 SR KX OSIRIA 241 AR KX OSIRIA 241 BR KX OSIRIA 242 AR KX OSIRIA 242 SR KX OSIRIA 251 BQ KX OSIRIA 280 B KX OT-Center RAMSES P PHARAO-II 10 (AC) PHARAO-II 11 (DC) PHARAO-II 14 (AC)

242 Q S Index 2010/2011 Type Article number EA/GTI number Page PHARAO-II 15 (DC) PHARAO-II 24 (AC) PHARAO-II 25 (DC) PHARAO-II Upgrade 4AR (AC) PlanoCentro 000-EBK PlanoCentro 000-ESR PlanoCentro 000-EWH PlanoCentro 000-UBK PlanoCentro 000-USR PlanoCentro 000-UWH PlanoCentro 101-EBK PlanoCentro 101-ESR PlanoCentro 101-EWH PlanoCentro 101-UBK PlanoCentro 101-USR PlanoCentro 101-UWH Plug-in socket BZ Plunge sensor RAMSES Power unit 24 V DC Power unit CO2 sensor Power unit DCF Power unit top2 GPS Power supply KX 160 ma Power supply KX 320 ma Power supply KX 640 ma Programming cable PHARAO Programming software PHARAO Presenceight Presenceight 180 BK Presenceight 180 SR Presenceight Presenceight 360 BK Presenceight 360 SR Q QuickFix circular cover QuickFix concrete circular cover QuickFix concrete ush-mount box QuickFix concrete ush-mount housing QuickFix concrete square cover QuickFix square cover QuickSafe QuickSet plus R RAMSES 366/1 top RAMSES 366/2 top RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES 712 KX RAMSES 713 FC KX RAMSES 713 S KX RAMSES Type Article number EA/GTI number Page RAMSES 714 A RAMSES 714 A/FH RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES 722 S RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES 741 RA RAMSES RAMSES 746 RA RAMSES RAMSES 748 RA RAMSES 751 RA RAMSES 770 KX RAMSES RAMSES 782 S RAMSES RAMSES 784 S RAMSES 811 top RAMSES 812 top RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set A RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set S RAMSES 831 top RAMSES 832 top RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set RAMSES 855 top2 OT RC lter RME 4 C-oad KX RME 4 I KX RME 4 S KX RME 8 KX RME 8 S KX RMG 4 C-oad KX RMG 4 I KX RMG 4 S KX RMG 8 KX RMG 8 S KX S SEEKTA 170 top SEEKTA 170 top2 24V SEEKTA 171 top2 RC SEEKTA 171 top2 RC 24V SEEKTA 172 top SEEKTA 172 top2 24V SEEKTA 173 DCF SendoClic SendoPro 868-A SME 2 S KX SMG 2 S KX Snap-on mounting 72 x Socket RAMSES SOTHIS SPHIX SPHIX AP SPHIX / SPHIX /2 AP SPHIX

243 Index 2010/2011 T Z Type Article number EA/GTI number Page SPHIX SPHIX SPHIX KX SPHIX 331 KX SPHIX 332 KX SPHIX corner angle SPHIX RC SPHIX RC 104 Pro SPHIX RC SPHIX RC 105 Pro SUD 228 II SU 180 a SU 181 d SU 181 h SU 181 h 12V SU 181 h 24V SU 188 g SU 188 h SU 188 hw SU 189 hw SU 189 s SU 189 s 110V SU 191 w SU 285/1 T SU 285/2 T SU 289 g SU 289 h Surface frame compact Surface frame ECO-IR Surface frame ECO-IR Surface frame Presenceight Surface-mounted light sensor SY 151 h SY 160 a SY 161 d SY 161 h SY 168 h SY 169 s SY 269 g SY 269 h T TA 2 KX TA 4 KX TA 6 KX Temperature sensor Terminal cover 52,5 mm theben-eltimo 020 S theben-eltimo 020 S DCF theben-timer theben-timer 26 IP theben-timer TM 171 h TM 178 h TM 179 h TM 345 B TM 345 M TR 030 top TR 608 top TR 610 top 24V Type Article number EA/GTI number Page TR 610 top TR 610 top2 24V TR 610 top2 G TR 611 top TR 611 top2 24V TR 611 top2 RC TR 611 top2 RC 24V TR 612 S KX TR 612 top 24V TR 612 top TR 612 top2 24V TR 622 top TR 622 top2 24V TR 635 top TR 636 top TR 641 S TR 641 S 12V TR 641 S DCF TR 641 top TR 641 top2 RC TR 642 S TR 642 S DCF TR 642 top TR 642 top2 RC TR 644 S TR 644 S 120V TR 644 S 12V TR 644 S 24V TR 644 S DCF TR 644 S DCF KX TR 644 S KX TR 644 top TR 644 top2 RC TR 648 S DCF KX TR 685/2 top V Valve adapter VA Valve adapter VA VARIA 824 KX VARIA 826 KX VARIA 826 KX W Wall mounting kit 105 mm Wall mounting kit 17,5 mm Wall mounting kit 35 mm Wall mounting kit 52,5 mm Wall mounting kit 70 mm Weather station basic KX Weather station KX Z ZS 600 DCF KX

244 Index 2010/2011 Article number Type EA/GTI number Page EPA EPA EPA EPA EPA EPA EPA theben-eltimo 020 S theben-eltimo 020 S DCF theben-timer theben-timer 26 IP theben-timer TR 030 top EPA EPA FRI 77 h FRI 77 g FRI 77 h FRI 77 g UXA UXA UXA UXA UXA UXA /150W UXA /150W UXA /500W UXA /500W UXA UXA / UXA AP UXA /2 AP UXA UXA T SPHIX AP SPHIX /2 AP SPHIX SPHIX / SPHIX SPHIX SPHIX SPHIX KX SPHIX 331 KX SPHIX 332 KX UA 108 E UA 108 A UA 109 A UA 109 E UA 110 A UA 110 E UA 110 A UA 111 top2 A UA 111 top2 E UA 112 top2 A UA 112 top2 E UA 120 top2 A UA 120 top2 E UA 121 top2 RC A UA 121 top2 RC E Article number Type EA/GTI number Page UA 122 top2 RC A UA 122 top2 RC E UA 126 star UA 127 star UA 128 star UA 129 star-time UA 130 KX A UA 131 S KX UA 131 DDC Weather station KX Weather station basic KX UA 133 KX BZ V BZ BZ BZ V BZ V BZ BZ BZ V BZ BZ BZ V BZ SY 151 h SY 160 a SY 161 h SY 161 d SY 168 h SY 169 s SEEKTA 170 top SEEKTA 170 top2 24V TM 171 h SEEKTA 171 top2 RC SEEKTA 171 top2 RC 24V SEEKTA 172 top SEEKTA 172 top2 24V SEEKTA 173 DCF TM 178 h TM 179 h SU 180 a SU 181 h SU 181 d SU 181 h 24V SU 181 h 12V SU 188 h SU 188 g SU 188 hw SU 189 hw SU 189 s SU 189 s 110V MEM 190 a SU 191 w MEM 198 h Presenceight Presenceight Presenceight 360 BK Presenceight 360 SR Presenceight 180 BK

245 Index 2010/ Article number Type EA/GTI number Page Presenceight 180 SR compact of ce compact of ce DIM compact passimo WH compact passage compact of ce BK compact of ce SR compact of ce DIM BK compact of ce DIM SR compact passage BK compact passage SR compact passimo BK compact passimo SR compact of ce 24V compact of ce 24V ux compact passage 24V compact of ce 24V BK compact of ce 24V SR compact of ce 24V ux BK compact of ce 24V ux SR compact passage 24V BK compact passage 24V SR compact of ce EIB compact passimo KX WH compact passage KX compact of ce EIB BK compact of ce EIB SR compact passage KX BK compact passage KX SR compact passimo KX BK compact passimo KX SR ECO-IR 360A ECO-IR 180A ECO-IR 360C T ECO-IR DUA-C T ECO-IR 360A BK ECO-IR 360A SR ECO-IR 180A BK ECO-IR 180A SR ECO-IR 360C T BK ECO-IR 360C T SR ECO-IR DUA-C T BK ECO-IR DUA-C T SR ECO-IR V ECO-IR 180A-24V ECO-IR V BK ECO-IR V SR ECO-IR 180A-24V BK ECO-IR 180A-24V SR ECO-IR DUA-EIB ECO-IR 360EIB-AC ECO-IR 180EIB-AC ECO-IR DUA-EIB BK ECO-IR DUA-EIB SR ECO-IR 360EIB-AC BK ECO-IR 360EIB-AC SR ECO-IR 180EIB-AC BK ECO-IR 180EIB-AC SR PlanoCentro 101-EWH Article number Type EA/GTI number Page PlanoCentro 101-EBK PlanoCentro 101-ESR PlanoCentro 101-UWH PlanoCentro 101-UBK PlanoCentro 101-USR PlanoCentro 000-EWH PlanoCentro 000-EBK PlanoCentro 000-ESR PlanoCentro 000-UWH PlanoCentro 000-UBK PlanoCentro 000-USR SUD 228 II SY 269 h SY 269 g SU 285/1 T SU 285/2 T SU 289 h SU 289 g TM 345 B TM 345 M RAMSES 366/1 top RAMSES 366/2 top UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR UXOR RMG 8 KX RME 8 KX JMG 4 24V DC KX JME 4 24V DC KX HMT 6 KX HMT 12 KX RMG 4 S KX RME 4 S KX RMG 4 C-oad KX RME 4 C-oadKX HMG 4 KX HME 4 KX BMG 6 KX BME 6 KX JMG 4 S KX JME 4 S KX DMG 2 S KX DME 2 S KX DMB 2 S KX SMG 2 S KX SME 2 S KX FCA 1 KX RMG 4 I KX RME 4 I KX RMG 8 S KX RME 8 S KX TA 2 KX

246 Index 2010/2011 Article number Type EA/GTI number Page TA 4 KX TA 6 KX UXOR Set UXOR Set OSIRIA 220 AR KX OSIRIA 230 AR KX OSIRIA 230 SR KX OSIRIA 232 BQ KX OSIRIA 240 AR KX OSIRIA 240 SR KX OSIRIA 241 AR KX OSIRIA 241 BR KX OSIRIA 242 AR KX OSIRIA 242 SR KX OSIRIA 251 BQ KX OSIRIA 280 B KX PHARAO-II 14 (AC) PHARAO-II 24 (AC) PHARAO-II 10 (AC) PHARAO-II 15 (DC) PHARAO-II 25 (DC) PHARAO-II Upgrade 4AR (AC) PHARAO-II 11 (DC) ZS 600 DCF KX TR 608 top TR 610 top TR 610 top2 G TR 610 top 24V TR 610 top2 24V TR 611 top TR 611 top2 RC TR 611 top2 24V TR 611 top2 RC 24V TR 612 top TR 612 top 24V TR 612 top2 24V TR 612 S KX TR 622 top TR 622 top2 24V TR 635 top TR 636 top TR 641 S TR 641 top TR 641 top2 RC TR 641 S DCF TR 641 S 12V TR 642 S TR 642 top TR 642 top2 RC TR 642 S DCF TR 644 S TR 644 top TR 644 top2 RC TR 644 S DCF TR 644 S 12V TR 644 S 24V TR 644 S 120V TR 644 S KX TR 644 S DCF KX Article number Type EA/GTI number Page TR 648 S DCF KX EM 4 top EM A top TR 685/2 top RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES 712 KX RAMSES 713 S KX RAMSES 713 FC KX RAMSES RAMSES 714 A RAMSES 714 A/FH SOTHIS AMU 716 R AMU 716 USB AMU 716 KX RAMSES RAMSES RAMSES 722 S RAMSES CHEOPS drive KX CHEOPS control KX RAMSES RAMSES 741 RA RAMSES RAMSES 746 RA RAMSES RAMSES 748 RA RAMSES 751 RA RAMSES 770 KX RAMSES RAMSES 782 S RAMSES RAMSES 784 S RAMSES 811 top RAMSES 812 top RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set A RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set S VARIA 824 KX VARIA 826 KX VARIA 826 KX RAMSES 831 top RAMSES 832 top RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set RAMSES 855 top2 OT Front panel kit Surface-mounted light sensor Analogue ush-mounted light sensor Cover 55 x 55 for BZ Plug-in socket BZ

247 Index 2010/ Article number Type EA/GTI number Page Clamp BZ Wall mounting kit 70 mm Wall mounting kit 52,5 mm Wall mounting kit 105 mm Terminal cover 52,5 mm Wall mounting kit 35 mm Wall mounting kit 17,5 mm Snap-on mounting 72 x Cover 72 x 72 for BZ Front-kit BZ Memory card OBEISK Power unit DCF External temperature sensor External temperature sensor Adapter plate RAMSES Memory card OBEISK KX 16 K OBEISK PC set Antenna DCF Adapter RAMSES 72x/78x Flush-mounted light sensor UA KX Programming software PHARAO Programming cable PHARAO Antenna DCF77 KX OBEISK KX PC set Memory card OBEISK KX 64 K Temperature sensor Memory module PHARAO-II GSM cable PHARAO-II Antenna RAMES 813/ Power supply KX 640 ma Diode module UXOR Flow temperature sensor Plunge sensor RAMSES Mast mounting weather station GSM modem Interface USB KX ine coupler KX Memory card OBEISK top OBEISK top2 PC set Antenna top2 RC-DCF Digital surface-mounted light sensor Analogue surface-mounted light sensor OT-Center RAMSES Valve adapter VA Valve adapter VA Actuator APHA V Actuator APHA 4 24 V Digital ush-mounted light sensor External temperature sensor IP Adapter plate RAMSES 70x UA star adpater plate Article number Type EA/GTI number Page Power unit CO2 sensor Surface frame ECO-IR Surface frame ECO-IR Surface frame Presenceight Surface frame compact clic QuickFix square cover QuickFix circular cover QuickFix concrete square cover QuickFix concrete circular cover QuickFix concrete ush-mount box QuickFix concrete ush-mount housing RC lter Bus coupling unit KX QuickSafe QuickSet plus SPHIX corner angle SPHIX RC 104 Pro SPHIX RC 105 Pro SPHIX RC SPHIX RC Central part RAMSES Central part RAMSES 741/ Frame RAMSES 74x Socket RAMSES Antenna top2 RC-GPS UXA corner angle black UXA corner angle white SendoPro 868-A Junction casing 115 x 115 x 100 mm SendoClic Power supply KX 320 ma Power supply KX 160 ma Power unit top2 GPS Power unit 24 V DC

248 Discontinued models 2009/2010 Theben device type Art.o. Theben device type Art.o. Discontinued models Successors SUD 228 (8 h) SUD 228 II SUD 228 (9 h) SUD 228 II PHARAO-II Upgrade 4ED no successor RAMSES no successor RAMSES 742 RA no successor RAMSES 811 top RAMSES 811 top RAMSES 812 top RAMSES 812 top RAMSES 813 top HF Set RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set RAMSES 813 top HF Set RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set RAMSES 813 top HF Set A RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set A RAMSES 813 top HF Set x RAMSES 833 top2 HF Set 2 2 x RAMSES 813 top HF Set S RAMSES 813 top2 HF Set S RAMSES 816 top RAMSES 855 top2, depending on application also RAMSES 832 top2 possible , RAMSES 817 top RAMSES 855 top2, depending on application also RAMSES 832 top2 possible , RAMSES 818 top 6 A RAMSES 832 top2 + Floor sensor RAMSES 818 top 16 A RAMSES 832 top2 (Attention: only 6 A load instead of 16 A) + Floor sensor RAMSES 831 top RAMSES 831 top RAMSES 832 top RAMSES 832 top RAMSES 855 top RAMSES 855 top2 OT RAMSES 855 top + OT-Center RAMSES 855 top2 OT + RAMSES OT-Center Cover (RAMSES 7..) no successor TM 171 h SY 151 h SY 161 h , SY 161 d SU 181 h , , SU 181 d MEM 198 h SU 191 w SY 168 h SY 161 d TM 178 h SY 151 h SU 188 h SU 181 d TR 641 S TR 641 top TR 642 S TR 642 top TR 644 S TR 644 top TR 641 S DCF TR 641 top2 RC TR 642 S DCF TR 642 top2 RC TR 644 S DCF TR 644 top2 RC TR 685/2 top TR top DMG 2 KX DMG 2 S KX DME 2 KX DME 2 S KX DMB 2 KX DMB 2 S KX SMG 2 KX SMG 2 S KX SME 2 KX SME 2 S KX Power supply 320 ma Power supply 320 ma SEEKTA 173 DCF TR 642 top2 RC TR 610 top 24V TR 610 top2 24V TR 612 top 24V TR 612 top2 24V

249 Theben AG Your specialist partner Explanation of de nitions REDUCED TEMPERATURE Reduced room temperature during the night or when unoccupied, saves energy. Recommended temperature e. g. 16 C. COECTIO TYPE Contact type for connecting cables to device. ADJUSTABE OPERATIG POIT AD THERMA CIRCUATIO If room thermostats are unfavourably located, e. g. on external walls, the device operating point can be changed. Thermal circulation prevents rooms overheating. Adjustments can be made for especially fast or slow reacting heating systems. WORKIG VOTAGE ominal voltage required for operating device. Safe operation is guaranteed in in a tolerance range of ± 10%. POWER COSUMPTIO Power draw required to operate device without switching capacity. SUPPRESSIO MEASURES Despite internal safety measures, unusually strong interference elds can exceptionally interfere with microprocessorcontrolled timers. Interference can be prevented by taking the following actions during installation: Avoid installing in the immediate vicinity of inductive consumers. ay separate mains connections and use line lters if necessary Shield inductive consumer with Varistor or RC link. FROST PROTECTIO Operating mode for room thermostats for protecting the heating and water system from frost damage, e. g. +8 C. POWER RESERVE In the event of power loss, the timer continues to run for the duration of the power reserve thanks to a built-in power reserve. This removes the need to reset the timer. The power reserve details refer to the new condition and 20 C ambient temperature. The power reserve does however diminish in relation to service life and temperature. MAUA SWITCH Priority switch switches output to "Permanent O", "Permanent OFF" or to "Auto" for automatic time control. "Perm" means manual permanent switching of mechanical timers. CHAES umber of switching outputs/inputs for timers, twilight switches, controls and actuators. PROGRESS DISPAY Visual function check for mechanical timers. AMP OADS Energy saving lamps as well as sodium and mercury vapour lamps place a particular stress on the output contacts through high switch-on peaks. In isolated cases check whether a cutoff relay or cutout is required. FU POWER RESERVE If the power reserve is provided by a rechargeable battery then the power reserve is only fully available after a certain charging time. COTACT OPEIG WIDTH With switching contacts a distinction is made between a 3 mm greater or lesser contact distance. PROGRAM Time-related operational sequence dependent on preset commands. PUSE WIDTH MODUATIO OR HYSTERESIS COTROER Thermostat with pulse width modulation clock cyclically and have varied switching periods. The cycle is adjustable. Hysteresis controllers switch on if the set hysteresis temperature range is exceeded or not achieved. SWITCHIG CAPACITY is the maximum permissible loading of the switching contacts in amperes at the nominal voltage with resistive load. The details in brackets indicate the permissible inductive load at cos ϕ 0.6 (e. g. motor load). The AX supplement indicates the permissible uorescent lamp load. SWITCHIG PRE-SEECTIO Time limited manual change to switching period by anticipating the next switching command. E. g. OFF is manually changed to O until the next successive OFF command in the time program. The automatic time program then resumes. PROTECTIO CASS Devices in Germany have to meet various protection classes to satisfy requirements against accidentally touching live components and against too high non-contact voltage. Protection class I: All metal parts that can be touched during operation or maintenance must be connected to the earth conductor. Protection class II: The devices are double or triple insulated and do not have an earth connection. Protection class III: The devices are designed to be used with safety extra-low voltage and have neither internal nor external power circuits working on other voltages. MEMORY OCATIOS They are designed to store switching times made up of information on the day of week (if necessary date) switching time and switching status. EEPROM memory is not temporary storage and retains the information even without power supply for up to 10 years. 3 OR 4 WIRE SWITCHIG With staircase light timers the 3 or 4 wire riser can be used for keys or lights from oor to oor. PERMISSIBE AMBIET TEMPERATURE Temperature range that the device can function reliably in, e. g. constant ambient temperature. COUTIG RAGE Maximum number of operating hours that can be directly read. SEV (SAFETY EXTRA-OW VOTAGE) Voltage that does not exceed 42 V between the wires or between the wires and the earth where the idling voltage does not exceed 50 V. If SEV is taken from the mains supply then this must achieved via a safety transformer or a converter with separate winding with insulation that meets the requirements of double or increased insulation. PEV (PROTECTIVE EXTRA-OW VOTAGE) An earthed electric circuit operated with SEV which is separated from other circuits by basic insulation and protective sheathing, double insulation or increased insulation. Impressum Client: Theben AG, Haigerloch Advertising Manager: Klaus Tielmann Productdatabase Manager: Arne Mohl Realisation: Theben AG, Haigerloch Design by: Theben AG Sources of pictures: Studio Majer, Theben AG Print: edigor Druck und Medien GmbH

250 Your specialist partner General conditions Theben AG General conditions for the supply of products and services of the electrical and electronics industry ( G )* for commercial transactions between businesses I. General provisions 1. egal relations between Supplier and Purchaser in connection with supplies and/or services of the Supplier (hereinafter referred to as Supplies ) shall be solely governed by the present G. The Purchaser s general terms and conditions shall apply only if expressly accepted by the Supplier in writing. The scope of delivery shall be determined by the congruent mutual written declarations. 2. The Supplier herewith reserves any industrial property rights and/or copyrights pertaining to its cost estimates, drawings and other documents (hereinafter referred to as Documents ). The Documents shall not be made accessible to third parties without the Supplier s prior consent and shall, upon request, be returned without undue delay to the Supplier if the contract is not awarded to the Supplier. Sentences 1 and 2 shall apply mutatis mutandis to the Purchaser s Documents; these may, however, be made accessible to those third parties to whom the Supplier has rightfully subcontracted Supplies. 3. The Purchaser has the non-exclusive right to use standard software and rmware, provided that it remains unchanged, is used within the agreed performance parameters, and on the agreed equipment. Without express agreement the Purchaser may make one back-up copy of standard software. 4. Partial deliveries are allowed, unless they are unreasonable to accept for the Purchaser. 5. The term claim for damages used in the present G also includes claims for indemni cation for useless expenditure. statutory provisions providing that a remedy period is not needed shall be unaffected. The Purchaser shall be obliged to return the Retained Goods. The fact that the Supplier takes back Retained Goods and/or exercises the retention of title, or has the Retained Goods seized, shall not be construed to constitute a rescission of the contract, unless the Supplier so expressly declares. IV. Time for supplies; delay 1. Times set for Supplies shall only be binding if all Documents to be furnished by the Purchaser, necessary permits and approvals, especially concerning plans, are received in time and if agreed terms of payment and other obligations of the Purchaser are ful lled. If these conditions are not ful lled in time, times set shall be extended reasonably; this shall not apply if the Supplier is responsible for the delay. 2. If non-observance of the times set is due to force majeure such as mobilization, war, rebellion or similar events, e. g. strike or lockout, such time shall be extended accordingly. The same shall apply if the Supplier does not receive its own supplies in due time or in due form. 3. If the Supplier is responsible for the delay (hereinafter referred to as Delay ) and the Purchaser has demonstrably suffered a loss therefrom, the Purchaser may claim a compensation as liquidated damages of 0.5 % for every completed week of Delay, but in no case more than a total of 5 % of the price of that part of the Supplies which due to the Delay could not be put to the intended use. 2. The risk shall pass to the Purchaser if dispatch, delivery, the start or performance of assembly or erection, the taking over in the Purchaser s own works, or the trial run is delayed for reasons for which the Purchaser is responsible or if the Purchaser has otherwise failed to accept the Supplies. VI. Assembly and erection Unless otherwise agreed in written form, assembly and erection shall be subject to the following provisions: 1. The Purchaser shall provide at its own expense and in due time: a) all earth and construction work and other ancillary work outside the Supplier s scope, including the necessary skilled and unskilled labor, construction materials and tools, b) the equipment and materials necessary for assembly and commissioning such as scaffolds, lifting equipment and other devices as well as fuels and lubricants, c) energy and water at the point of use including connections, heating and lighting, d) suitable dry and lockable rooms of suf cient size adjacent to the site for the storage of machine parts, apparatus, materials, tools, etc. and adequate working and recreation rooms for the erection personnel, including sanitary facilities as are appropriate in the speci c circumstances; furthermore, the Purchaser shall take all measures it would take for the protection of its own possessions to protect the possessions of the Supplier and of the erection personnel at the site, e) protective clothing and protective devices needed due to particular conditions prevailing on the speci c site. 2. Before the erection work starts, the Purchaser shall unsolicitedly make available any information required concerning the location of concealed electric power, gas and water lines or of similar installations as well as the necessary structural data. 3. Prior to assembly or erection, the materials and equipment necessary for the work to start must be available on the site of assembly or erection and any preparatory work must have advanced to such a degree that assembly or erection can be started as agreed and carried out without interruption. Access roads and the site of assembly or erection must be level and clear. 4. If assembly, erection or commissioning is delayed due to circumstances for which the Supplier is not responsible, the Purchaser shall bear the reasonable costs incurred for idle times and any additional traveling expenditure of the Supplier or the erection personnel. 5. The Purchaser shall attest to the hours worked by the erection personnel towards the Supplier at weekly intervals and the Purchaser shall immediately con rm in written form if assembly, erection or commissioning has been completed. 6. If, after completion, the Supplier demands acceptance of the Supplies, the Purchaser shall comply therewith within a period of two weeks. In default thereof, acceptance is deemed to have taken place. Acceptance is also deemed to have been effected if the Supplies are put to use, after completion of an agreed test phase, if any. 15 II. Prices, terms of payment, and set-off 1. Prices are ex works and excluding packaging; value added tax shall be added at the then applicable rate. 2. If the Supplier is also responsible for assembly or erection and unless otherwise agreed, the Purchaser shall pay the agreed remuneration and any incidental costs required, e. g. for traveling and transport as well as allowances. 3. Payments shall be made free Supplier s paying of ce. 4. The Purchaser may set off only those claims which are undisputed or nonappealable. III. Retention of title 1. The items pertaining to the Supplies ( Retained Goods ) shall remain the Supplier s property until each and every claim the Supplier has against the Purchaser on account of the business relationship has been ful lled. If the combined value of the Supplier s security interests exceeds the value of all secured claims by more than 10 %, the Supplier shall release a corresponding part of the security interest if so requested by the Purchaser; the Supplier shall be entitled to choose which security interest it wishes to release. 2. For the duration of the retention of title, the Purchaser may not pledge the Retained Goods or use them as security, and resale shall be possible only for resellers in the ordinary course of their business and only on condition that the reseller receives payment from its customer or makes the transfer of property to the customer dependent upon the customer ful lling its obligation to effect payment. 3. The Purchaser shall inform the Supplier forthwith of any seizure or other act of intervention by third parties. 4. Where the Purchaser fails to ful l its duties, fails to make payment due, or otherwise violates its obligations the Supplier shall be entitled to rescind the contract and take back the Retained Goods in the case of continued failure following expiry of a reasonable remedy period set by the Supplier; the 4. Purchaser s claims for damages due to delayed Supplies as well as claims for damages in lieu of performance exceeding the limits speci ed in o. 3 above are excluded in all cases of delayed Supplies, even upon expiry of a time set to the Supplier to effect the Supplies. This shall not apply in cases of mandatory liability based on intent, gross negligence, or due to loss of life, bodily injury or damage to health. Rescission of the contract by the Purchaser based on statute is limited to cases where the Supplier is responsible for the delay. The above provisions do not imply a change in the burden of proof to the detriment of the Purchaser. 5. At the Supplier s request, the Purchaser shall declare within a reasonable period of time whether it, due to the delayed Supplies, rescinds the contract or insists on the delivery of the Supplies. 6. If dispatch or delivery, due to Purchaser s request, is delayed by more than one month after noti cation of the readiness for dispatch was given, the Purchaser may be charged, for every additional month commenced, storage costs of 0.5 % of the price of the items of the Supplies, but in no case more than a total of 5 %. The parties to the contract may prove that higher or, as the case may be, lower storage costs have been incurred. V. Passing of risk 1. Even where delivery has been agreed freight free, the risk shall pass to the Purchaser as follows: a) if the Supplies do not include assembly or erection, at the time when the Supplies are shipped or picked up by the carrier. Upon the Purchaser s request, the Supplier shall insure the Supplies against the usual risks of transport at the Purchaser s expense; b) if the Supplies include assembly or erection, at the day of taking over in the Purchaser s own works or, if so agreed, after a fault-free trial run. VII. Receiving supplies The Purchaser shall not refuse to receive Supplies due to minor defects. 250

251 Theben AG Your specialist partner General conditions VIII. Defects as to quality The Supplier shall be liable for defects as to quality ( Sachmängel, hereinafter referred to as Defects,) as follows: 1. Defective parts or defective services shall be, at the Supplier s discretion, repaired, replaced or provided again free of charge, provided that the reason for the Defect had already existed at the time when the risk passed. 2. Claims for repair or replacement are subject to a statute of limitations of 12 months calculated from the start of the statutory statute of limitations; the same shall apply mutatis mutandis in the case of rescission and reduction. This shall not apply where longer periods are prescribed by law according to Sec. 438 para. 1 o. 2 (buildings and things used for a building), Sec. 479 para. 1 (right of recourse), and Sec. 634a para. 1 o. 2 (defects of a building) German Civil Code ( BGB ), in the case of intent, fraudulent concealment of the Defect or non-compliance with guaranteed characteristics (Beschaffenheitsgarantie). The legal provisions regarding suspension of the statute of limitations ( Ablaufhemmung, Hemmung ) and recommencement of limitation periods shall be unaffected. 3. oti cations of Defect by the Purchaser shall be given in written form without undue delay. 4. In the case of noti cation of a Defect, the Purchaser may withhold payments to an amount that is in a reasonable proportion to the Defect. The Purchaser, however, may withhold payments only if the subject-matter of the noti cation of the Defect involved is justi ed and incontestable. The Purchaser has no right to withhold payments to the extent that its claim of a Defect is time-barred. Unjusti ed noti cations of Defect shall entitle the Supplier to demand reimbursement of its expenses by the Purchaser. 5. The Supplier shall be given the opportunity to repair or to replace the defective good ( acherfüllung ) within a reasonable period of time. 6. If repair or replacement is unsuccessful, the Purchaser is entitled to rescind the contract or reduce the remuneration; any claims for damages the Purchaser may have according to o. 10 shall be unaffected. 7. There shall be no claims based on Defect in cases of insigni cant deviations from the agreed quality, of only minor impairment of usability, of natural wear and tear, or damage arising after the passing of risk from faulty or negligent handling, excessive strain, unsuitable equipment, defective civil works, inappropriate foundation soil, or claims based on particular external in uences not assumed under the contract, or from non-reproducible software errors. Claims based on defects attributable to improper modi cations or repair work carried out by the Purchaser or third parties and the consequences thereof are likewise excluded. 8. The Purchaser shall have no claim with respect to expenses incurred in the course of supplementary performance, including costs of travel, transport, labor, and material, to the extent that expenses are increased because the subjectmatter of the Supplies has subsequently been brought to another location than the Purchaser s branch of ce, unless doing so complies with the normal use of the Supplies. 9. The Purchaser s right of recourse against the Supplier pursuant to Sec. 478 BGB is limited to cases where the Purchaser has not concluded an agreement with its customers exceeding the scope of the statutory provisions governing claims based on Defects. Moreover, o. 8 above shall apply mutatis mutandis to the scope of the right of recourse the Purchaser has against the Supplier pursuant to Sec. 478 para. 2 BGB. 10. The Purchaser shall have no claim for damages based on Defects. This shall not apply to the extent that a Defect has been fraudulently concealed, the guaranteed characteristics are not complied with, in the case of loss of life, bodily injury or damage to health, restrictions to liberty and/or intentionally or grossly negligent breach of contract on the part of the Supplier. The above provisions do not imply a change in the burden of proof to the detriment of the Purchaser. Any other or additional claims of the Purchaser exceeding the claims provided for in this Article VIII, based on a Defect, are excluded. IX. Indusrial property rights and copyright; defects in title 1. Unless otherwise agreed, the Supplier shall provide the Supplies free from third parties industrial property rights and copyrights (hereinafter referred to as IPR ) with respect to the country of the place of delivery only. If a third party asserts a justi ed claim against the Purchaser based on an infringement of an IPR by the Supplies made by the Supplier and used in conformity with the contract, the Supplier shall be liable to the Purchaser within the time period stipulated in Article VIII o. 2 as follows: a) The Supplier shall choose whether to acquire, at its own expense, the right to use the IPR with respect to the Supplies concerned or whether to modify the Supplies such that they no longer infringe the IPR or replace them. If this would be impossible for the Supplier under reasonable conditions, the Purchaser may rescind the contract or reduce the remuneration pursuant to the applicable statutory provisions. b) The Supplier s liability to pay damages is governed by Article XI. c) The above obligations of the Supplier shall apply only if the Purchaser (i) immediately noti es the Supplier of any such claim asserted by the third party in written form, (ii) does not concede the existence of an infringement and (iii) leaves any protective measures and settlement negotiations to the Supplier s discretion. If the Purchaser stops using the Supplies in order to reduce the damage or for other good reason, it shall be obliged to point out to the third party that no acknowledgement of the alleged infringement may be inferred from the fact that the use has been discontinued. 2. Claims of the Purchaser shall be excluded if it is responsible for the infringement of an IPR. 3. Claims of the Purchaser are also excluded if the infringement of the IPR is caused by speci cations made by the Purchaser, by a type of use not foreseeable by the Supplier or by the Supplies being modi ed by the Purchaser or being used together with products not provided by the Supplier. 4. In addition, with respect to claims by the Purchaser pursuant to o. 1 a) above, Article VIII os. 4, 5, and 9 shall apply mutatis mutandis in the event of an infringement of an IPR. 5. Where other defects in title occur, Article VIII shall apply mutatis mutandis. 6. Any other claims of the Purchaser against the Supplier or its agents or any such claims exceeding the claims provided for in this Article IX, based on a defect in title, are excluded. X. Impossiblity of performance; adaption of contract 1. To the extent that delivery is impossible, the Purchaser is entitled to claim damages, unless the Supplier is not responsible for the impossibility. The Purchaser s claim for damages is, however, limited to an amount of 10 % of the value of as of June 2005 the part of the Supplies which, owing to the impossibility, cannot be put to the intended use. This limitation shall not apply in the case of mandatory liability based on intent, gross negligence or loss of life, bodily injury or damage to health; this does not imply a change in the burden of proof to the detriment of the Purchaser. The Purchaser s right to rescind the contract shall be unaffected. 2. Where unforeseeable events within the meaning of Article IV o. 2 substantially change the economic importance or the contents of the Supplies or considerably affect the Supplier s business, the contract shall be adapted taking into account the principles of reasonableness and good faith. To the extent this is not justi able for economic reasons, the Supplier shall have the right to rescind the contract. If the Supplier intends to exercise its right to rescind the contract, it shall notify the Purchaser thereof without undue delay after having realized the repercussions of the event; this shall also apply even where an extension of the delivery period has previously been agreed with the Purchaser. XI. Other claims for damages; statute of limitations 1. The Purchaser has no claim for damages based on whatever legal reason, including infringement of duties arising in connection with the contract or tort. 2. The above shall not apply in the case of mandatory liability, e. g. under the German Product iability Act ( Produkthaftungsgesetz ), in the case of intent, gross negligence, loss of life, bodily injury or damage to health, or breach of a condition which goes to the root of the contract ( wesentliche Vertragsp ichten ). However, claims for damages arising from a breach of a condition which goes to the root of the contract shall be limited to the foreseeable damage which is intrinsic to the contract, unless caused by intent or gross negligence or based on liability for loss of life, bodily injury or damage to health. The above provision does not imply a change in the burden of proof to the detriment of the Purchaser. 3. To the extent that the Purchaser has a claim for damages, it shall be timebarred upon expiration of the statute of limitations pursuant to Article VIII o. 2. The same shall apply to the Purchauser s claims in connection with actions undertaken to avoid any damage (e. g. callback). In the case of claims for damages under the German Product iability Act, the statutory statute of limitations shall apply. XII. Venue and applicable law 1. If the Purchaser is a businessman, sole venue for all disputes arising directly or indirectly out of the contract shall be the Supplier s place of business. However, the Supplier may also bring an action at the Purchaser s place of business. 2. egal relations existing in connection with this contract shall be governed by German substantive law, to the exclusion of the United ations Convention on contracts for the International Sale of Goods (CISG). XIII. Severability clause The legal invalidity of one or more provisions of this Agreement in no way affects the validity of the remaining provisions. This shall not apply if it would be unreasonable for one of the parties to be obligated to continue the contract

252 Theben AG worlwide Group companies Agencies Theben AG 15 HEADQUARTERS Theben AG Hohenbergstr. 32 D Haigerloch Postfach 56 D Haigerloch Phone / Fax / info@theben.de THEBE GROUP COMPAIES Timeguard td Victory Park 400 Edgeware Road ondon W2 6D Phone Fax csc@timeguard.com THEBE S.A.R.. Zone Industrielle des Vignes rue Bernard Bobigny cédex Phone Fax theben@theben.fr Theben HTS AG Im anghag Effretikon Phone Fax info@theben-hts.ch THEBE S.R.. Via Simone de Gatti, Bresso Phone Fax info@theben.it Theben AG Jewelry Trade Center 919/341 Floor 27 (Building o. 1, orth) Silom Road, Silom Bangrak Bangkok Thailand Phone Fax Mobil bernd.dluzak@theben-asia.com WORDWIDE AGECIES ARGETIA HERTIG SA. Bolivar 1335 C1141AAD Ciudad de Buenos Aires Phone Fax ventas@hertig.com.ar AUSTRAIA OMEGA POWER EQUIPMET P/ 47 Bennet Street Dandenong Victoria 3175 Phone Fax sales@omega.com.au AUSTRIA SIBIK EEKTRIK GmbH & CO. KG Murbangasse Wien Phone Fax info@siblik.com BEGIUM TEMPOEC SA. 49, Route de Biesme 6530 Thuin Phone Fax info@tempolec.be BUGARIA SEO SOFIA TD. 26, ikolay Palauzov St Gabrovo Phone Fax seno@senoso a.com a.com CAADA DAVIS COTROS IMITED 2200 Bristol Circle Oakville Ontario 6H 5R3 Phone Fax info@daviscontrols.com CHIE SCHARFSTEI SA Av. Sta. Maria 0510 Providencia, Santiago Phone Fax scharfstein@scharfstein.cl CHIA/HOG KOG JEBSE & CO. TD. China Trade Division 30/F. ee Gardens Two 28 Yun Pin Road HK Causeway Bay Phone Fax raymondchiu@jebsen.com CYPRUS PAMBOS ICOAOU & SO TD. 38 Strovolos Street Tseri 2480 icosia Phone Fax nicha@cytanet.com.cy CZECH REPUBIC EEKTRO SYSTEM TECHIK spol. s.r.o. Pod Pekarnami 338/ Praha 9 Vysocany Phone Fax est@est-praha.cz DEMARK GYCOM DAMARK A/S Theilgaards Torv Køge Phone Fax sales.dk@gycom.com EGYPT MOUADECO EGIEERIG & TRADIG CO 241, El Hegaz Street Flat 8 Heliopolis, Cairo Phone Fax mounadelco@hotmail.com ESTOIA VAI BATIC AS Mäepealse Tallinn Phone Fax info@vallin.ee FIAD GYCOM FIAD OY P.O. Box 62 Pakkalantie 30 A 1531 Vantaa Phone Fax etunimi.sukunimi@gycom.com GREECE COSTATACATOS BROTHERS SA. 17 Km Ethnikis Athinon amias Ki ssia Phone Fax sales@akbros.gr HUGARY KAMEITHER KFT Budapest Rákóczi Ferenc tu Budapest Phone Fax info@theben.hu Elektropro Kereskedelmi KFT Albertirsai ut Budapest Phone Fax info@elektropro.hu ICEAD REYKJAFE TD. Skipholti Reykjavik Phone Fax reykjafell@reykjafell.is IDIA IDO ASIA MARKETIG TD. B 200 Phase II oida U. P Phone Fax sales@indoasian.com IDOESIA P. T. GUA ERA DISTRIBUSI Jl Rawa Gelam II o. 8 Jakarta Timur Phone Fax C-Service@GED-GAE.co.id IRA S.G. RIAZI TRADIG P.O. Box 14185/599 o. 4, Bld. 12, Parastoo St., Valiasr Ave. Tehran Phone Fax info@sgrtrading.net IREAD PEW GROUP Unit 6 orthwest Business Park Blanchardstown, Dublin 15 Phone Fax info@pewl.ie ISRAE GAOZ EECTROICS TD. P. O. Box 35 Rosh Ha ayin Galoz Building 15, Hameretz Street Rosh Ha ayin Phone Fax sales@galoz.co.il JORDA OOR AA OOR EST. 214 Gardens Street Amman Phone Fax hothyfa@nooralanoor.net 252

253 Theben AG Theben AG worldwide Group companies Agencies KOREA MEC MAHAI EECTRIC Co., TD 792-7, Yeoksam-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul , Korea Phone Fax yskim@hanmec.co.kr ORWAY GYCOM ORGE AS Gjerdums vei Oslo Phone Fax gycom.no@gycom.com SERBIA SOBE D.O.O Miska Jovanovica Belgrad Phone Fax of ce@sobel.co.yu THAIAD TECHOOGY ISTRUMETS CO. TD 208/ Pattanakarn Rd., Pravet, Bangkok Phone Fax ttic@inet.co.th EBAO EST. GARABED AYAIA & SOS P. O. Box Gouraud Avenue Beirut Phone or Fax gasons@dm.net.lb ATVIA VAI BATIC SIA Maskavas str Riga Phone Fax info@vallin.lv ITHUAIA VAI BATIC UAB Seimyniskiu str. 5A Vilnius Phone Fax info@vallin.lt MAAYSIA EECTECH DISTRIBUTIO SYSTEMS SD. BHD. 16 1, Jalan 6/89 B, Kawasan Perindustrian Trisegi, Batu 3 1/2, Off Jalan Sungei Besi Kuala umpur Phone Fax info@edsm.com.my MOTEEGRO Rarovac Komerc Podgorica Bracana Bracanovica Podgorica Phone Fax rarovackomerc@cg.yu MOROCCO GEERA TECHICS 22 Rue Rahal Ben Ahmed (Ex. Rue Dinant) Casablanca Phone Fax genetech@menara.ma ETHERADS DURICK B.V. Mijlweg BE Dordrecht Phone Fax durinck@durinck.nl OMA STARS IGHT..C. P.O. Box Ruwi Phone Fax starmail@omantel.net.om PHIIPPIES AVESCO MARKETIG CORPORATIO 810 Aurora Blvd., corner Yale St Cubao, Quezon City Phone Fax / avesco@avesco.bayandsl.ph POAD PPUH E-TEAM al. Mlodych Siemianowice Phone Fax el-team@el-team.com.pl PORTUGA D-DUARTE EVES,.DA Rua D do úcleo Empresarial de Venda do Pinheiro Quinta dos Estrangeiros, PAVIHAO Venda do Pinheiro Phone Fax info@duarteneves.pt RUSSIA MARBE Rizhsky passage Moscow Phone sales-msk@marbel.ru Bolshoi Sampsonievsky St. Petersburg Phone sales-spb@marbel.ru SAUDI ARABIA AWAR A-WESSAM EST. P. O. Box Gurabi Bin Shaihon Center Riyadh P.O. Box Phone Fax info@al-wessam.com SIGAPORE ITE EECTRIC SYSTEMS CO PTE. TD. 1 Harrison Road #01-01, ITE Electric Building Singapore Phone Fax cseng@ite.com.sg SOVEIA OKO tech d.o.o. Ul. Mileve Zakrajskove Maribor Phone Fax okotech@siol.net SOUTH AFRICA SUPARUE SA (PTY) TD. Units Simba Street Sebenza, Edenvale Phone +27-(0) Fax +27-(0) steve@suparule.co.za SPAI GUIJARRO HERMAOS S. Poligono Industrial Virgen de butarque Isaac Peral, eganes (Madrid) Phone Fax theben@guijarro-hnos.es SWEDE GYCOM SVESKA AB Box 1203 Stockholmsvägen Täby Phone Fax info@gycom.se SYRIA BOUZO ERB Trading-Consulting P.O.Box Damascus Phone Fax bouzo_f@z&.com TAIWA CAAA EECTRIC CORP. P. O. 6F5 o. 63 Sec 2 Chang An East Rd. Taipei 104 Phone Fax canaano@ms15.hinet.net TUESIA ABE AFRIQUE Zone Industrielle "Morize" T 2090 MORAG Phone Fax tfe.abelafrique@topnet.tn TURKEY GÖKHA EEKTRIK Perpa Elektrokent Is Merkezi A Blok K.8 o Okmeydaný/Ýstanbul Phone Fax ufuk@gokhanelektrik.com.tr UKRAIE KVK-Electro, td. 43 Kikvidze Str Kyiv Phone Fax info@kvk.kiev.ua UITED ARAB EMIRATES BI HAM EECTROMECH. EST. P. O. Box 4301 Dubai Phone Fax bheet@emirates.net.ae URUGUAY BERO S.A. Av. Gral. San Martin 2761 esq. Burgues Montevideo Phone Fax beron@beron.com.uy USA UMEITE EECTROIC CO orth 17th. Av. Franklin Park, Illinois Phone Fax customerservice@lumenite.com VIETAM RUDOF IETZ, IC. Representative Of ce Vietnam 162 Pasteur Street District 1, Ho Chi Minh City Phone Fax theben@lietz.com.vn

254 Theben AG worlwide Agencies and KX partners Theben AG AGECIES IDIA BE IGHTIG (DIVISIO OF BHAVAA IGHTIG PVT TD.) 10, Rose Blossom, 18, 18/A, Sitladevi Temple Road Mahim, Mumbai Phone Fax ORWAY STORK Brynsveien Kolsas Phone Fax PARTERS UXEMBOURG MARCO ZEER 4, rue de la Foret 8065 Bertrange Phone Fax contact@zenner.lu ORWAY STORK Brynsveien Kolsas Phone Fax stork@stork.no UITED ARAB EMIRATES EuroSmarTech..C. P.O.Box 25 Dubai U.A.E. Phone ext. 159 Fax aalamin@alyousuf.com THAIAD ibuilt AUTOMATIO CO., TD. 44/78 79 M.8 Ramintra 63/1 Rd Ta-rang, Bangkhen, Bangkok Phone Fax patomporn@ibuilt.co.th TURKEY OSKAR EEKTRIK SA TIC TD. STI. Karman Ciftilik Yolu Kurucular Sitesi Saadept Apte. 44/ Icerenköy-Ýstanbul Phone Fax omural@oskarelektrik.net CETIER EEKTRIK Sureyyapaþa Cad. o: Pendik/Ýstanbul Phone Fax cetinler@cetinler.com.tr

255 Theben AG Advertising material order Free of charge Further detailed information is available on request free of charge! FAX +49 (0) 74 74/ or local office see pages Theben General catalogue 2010 Product catalogue TIME Product catalogue IGHT Product catalogue CIMATE Product catalogue KX building system engineering eaflet Presence detectors eaflet Movement detectors eaflet Small control units PHARAO-II eaflet iving comfort control units UXOR eaflet Theben everywhere at home eaflet 12 useful energy saving tips eaflet EERGY SAVIG IDEAS Under you can find the leaflets above as pdf-files. In addition, you can find downloads on the Internet at: Texts for tenders Operating instructions Databases KX-manuals KX-databases OBEISK-software Supplementary lists for units not in the current range Certificates Sender Company Street Phone Fax Contacts Post code/ocation Mobile Trade Industry Wholesale Please put me in contact with one of your technical advisors. Theben AG, Hohenbergstraße 32, Haigerloch, Phone +49 (0) 74 74/6 92-0, Fax +49 (0) 74 74/

256 Theben AG Hohenbergstraße 32, Haigerloch, GERMAY Postfach 56, Haigerloch, GERMAY Phone +49 (0) 74 74/ Fax +49 (0) 74 74/ We reserve the right to make technical modi cations and improvements.